MSW FI-7500 - Frequency converter

FI-7500 - Frequency converter MSW - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free FI-7500 MSW in PDF.

📄 999 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice MSW FI-7500 - page 148
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about FI-7500 MSW

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Frequency converter in PDF format for free! Find your manual FI-7500 - MSW and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. FI-7500 by MSW.

USER MANUAL FI-7500 MSW

text_image Ventiating Fan Panel shell operation panel Middle shell Pan Inverter Nameplate Bottom mounting hole
natural_image Technical line drawing of a rectangular enclosure with dimensions labeled D and H (no text or symbols beyond labels)

MSW FI-7500 - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a dual fan assembly (no text or symbols)
text_image W A m 13.2

MSW FI-7500 - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of a rectangular enclosure or enclosure with dimensions labeled H1 and D, showing internal layout and mounting points (no text or symbols beyond labels)
text_image >100mm A A ≥100mm

Gehäusemontage

MSW FI-7500 - 3

natural_image Line drawing of two identical rectangular electronic devices with control panels and indicator lights (no text or symbols)
natural_image Technical line drawing of a multi-level industrial machine or server unit (no text or symbols visible)
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device with internal components and mounting holes (no text or symbols)
text_image Less than 20 meters Potentiometer VFD +10V AI1 GND PE

Figure 3-7 Wiring diagram of analog input terminal

MSW FI-7500 - 4

text_image External analog source 0.022uF , 50V cross or wind 2~3 turns in same direction Ferrite core VFD AI1 GND

Figure 3-8 Treatment wiring diagram of analog input terminal

line | Frequency (%) | Spannung Vb in %. | |---|---| | 0 | V1 | | F2 | V2 | | F3 | V3 | | Fb | V3 |
text_image K1 0 0 0 1 1 K2 Run command Stop Reversion Forward Stop VFD K1 K2 DI1: Forward run (PWD) DI2: Reverse running (REV) COM: Digital common port
text_image K1 K2 Run command 0 0 Stop 0 1 Reversion 1 0 Forward 1 1 Stop K1 K2 VFDN200G D11: Forward run (PWD) D12: Reverse running (REV) COM: Digital common port
flowchart
graph TD
    A["SB2"] --> B["DI1"]
    C["SB1"] --> D["DI3 Three line operation control"]
    E["SB3"] --> F["DI2 Reverse run (REV)"]
    B --> G["VFD Forward running (FWD)"]
    D --> G
    F --> G
    G --> H["COM Digital public end"]
line | Frequency (V) | Earnings (%) | | ------------- | ------------ | | 0V | 0 | | 10V | 100.0 |
text_image Diagram showing a symmetric curve with labeled axes and two vertical dashed lines, likely representing a mathematical or physical concept.
line | Time t | Output frequency Hz | DC injection braking initial frequency | Output voltage effective value | Halt DC braking amount | Run command | Halt DC braking time | | ------ | ------------------- | ---------------------------------------- | ------------------------------- | ----------------------- | ----------- | -------------------- | | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1 | 0 | 1 | 0.5 | 0.5 | 0 | 0.5 | | 2 | 0 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 1 | | 3 | 0 | 1 | 1.5 | 1.5 | 0 | 1.5 | | 4 | 0 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 0 | 2 | | 5 | 0 | 1 | 2.5 | 2.5 | 0 | 2.5 | | 6 | 0 | 1 | 3 | 3 | 0 | 3 | | 7 | 0 | 1 | 3.5 | 3.5 | 0 | 3.5 | | 8 | 0 | 1 | 4 | 4 | 0 | 4 | | 9 | 0 | 1 | 4.5 | 4.5 | 0 | 4.5 | | 10 | 0 | 1 | 5 | 5 | 0 | 5 | | 11 | 0 | 1 | 5.5 | 5.5 | 0 | 5.5 | | 12 | 0 | 1 | 6 | 6 | 0 | 6 | | 13 | 0 | 1 | 6.5 | 6.5 | 0 | 6.5 | | 14 | 0 | 1 | 7 | 7 | 0 | 7 | | 15 | 0 | 1 | 7.5 | 7.5 | 0 | 7.5 | | 16 | 0 | 1 | 8 | 8 | 0 | 8 | | 17 | 0 | 1 | 8.5 | 8.5 | 0 | 8.5 | | 18 | 0 | 1 | 9 | 9 | 0 | 9 | | 19 | 0 | 1 | 9.5 | 9.5 | 0 | 9.5 | | 20 | 0 | 1 | 10 | 10 | 0 | 10 | | Note: The output voltage effective value and halt voltage waiting time are not explicitly provided in the code snippet from the original plot. The output voltage effective value and halt voltage waiting time are not explicitly provided in the code snippet from the original plot. The output voltage effective value and halt voltage waiting time are not explicitly provided in the code snippet from the original plot. The output voltage effective value and halt voltage waiting time are not explicitly provided in the code snippet from the original plot. The output voltage effective value and halt voltage waiting time are not explicitly provided in the code snippet from the original plot. The output voltage effective value and halt DC braking amount are calculated based on the formula used for each variable at that point. The halt DC braking amount is calculated using the formula applied to the dashed line between two vertical lines. The halt DC braking time is calculated using the formula applied to the dashed line between two vertical lines and horizontal lines. The halt DC braking time is calculated using the formula applied to the dashed line between two vertical lines and horizontal lines. The halt DC braking time is calculated using the formula applied to the dashed line between two vertical lines and horizontal lines. The halt DC braking time is calculated using the formula applied to the dashed line between two vertical lines and horizontal lines. The halt DC braking time is calculated using the formula applied to the dashed line between two vertical lines and horizontal lines. The halt DC braking time does not be determined from the original plot or data points.
P7-03LED display running parameters 1Factory default1F
Setting range0000~FFFFMSW FI-7500 - 5Running frequency 1 (Hz)Set frequency (Hz)Bus voltage (V)Output voltage (V)Output current (A)Output power (kW)Output torque (%)DI input status (V)DO output statusAI1 voltage (V)AI2 voltage (V)AI3 voltage (V)Count valueLength valueLoad speed displayPID settingIf a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set P7-0 3 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
P7-04LED display running parameters 2Factory default0
Setting range0000~FFFFMSW FI-7500 - 6PID feedbackPLC stagePulse setting frequency (kHz)Running frequency 2Remaining running timeAI1 voltage before correctionAI2 voltage before correctionAI3 voltage before correctionLinear speedCurrent power-on time (Hour)Current running time (Minute)Pulse setting frequency (Hz)Communication setting valueEncoder feedback speed (Hz)Main frequency X display (Hz)Auxiliary frequency Y display (Hz)If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set P7 - 0 4 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
line | PID-Abweichung | Parametr PID | |---|---| | PA-05, PA-06, PA-07 | 1 | | PA-19 | 1 | | PA-20 | 1 | | PA-15, PA-16, PA-17 | 1 |
natural_image Technical line drawing of an internal electronic device casing with ventilation grilles and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device chassis with mounting brackets and a vertical support structure (no text or symbols)
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device chassis with mounting brackets and ventilation slots (no text or symbols)

General functions and descriptions of frequency convertor:

1) Abundant voltage classes: support three voltage classes, namely single-phase 220V, three-phase 220V and three-phase 380V.
2) Abundant control mode: apart from vector control of velocity sensor, sensorless vector control and V/F control, support V/F separation control.
3) Abundant field bus: support Modbus-RTU and CANlink field bus.
4) Abundant encoder types: support difference encoder, open collector encoder and rotary transformer, etc.
5) Brand-new sensorless vector control algorithm

Brand-new SVC creates better low-velocity stability, stronger low-frequency load capacity, and supports torque control of SVC.

6) Powerful background software: uploading, downloading parameters, real-time oscilloscope can be realized on background software.

Functions Descriptions

Overheat protection of motorAfter choosing PC1 expansion card, AI3 can receive temperature sensor input of motor (PT100, PT1000) to realize overheat protection
Fast current limitingAvoid over-current fault of frequency convertor
Dual motor switchTwo sets of motor parameters can realize dual motor switch
Restore user parametersUsers can save or restore own parameter settings
Accurate AIAOAfter factory calibration (or spot calibration), AIAO accuracy can be<20mv
Show customized parametersUsers can customize function parameters to be displayed
Show altered parametersUser can view function parameters after modification
Optional fault handing waysUsers can select action modes of convertor after confirming certain faults: free halting, deceleration halting, continual operation. The users can also select frequency for continual operation.
PID parameter switchTwo sets of PID parameters can switch by terminal or based on deviation
PID feedback loss detectionPID feedback loss detection value realizes protection during PID operation
DIDO positive/negative logicUsers can set positive/negative logic of DIDO
DIDO response delayUsers can set response delay time of DIDO
Run under instantaneous stopFrequency convertor continues running within short time if instantaneous power outage or voltage decrease
Timing operationSupport timing operation for 6,500 minutes at most

Opening for inspection:

When opening the box, please carefully confirm if the nameplate model and rated value of frequency convertor are consistent with order. The package contains ordered machine, qualification certificate, operation manual and warranty bill.

If any damage during transportation or certain omission, please contact with our company or supplier.

Chapter 1 Safety information and precautions

Safety definition: safety precautions are divided into two categories in the manual:

MSW FI-7500 - Chapter 1 Safety information and precautions - 1

Danger: serious injury and death may occur due to operation against requirements;

MSW FI-7500 - Chapter 1 Safety information and precautions - 2

Caution: moderate or minor injury, equipment damage may occur due to operation against requirements;

Please read this chapter carefully when installing, debugging and maintaining the system, and operate as per safety precautions. The company will not be liable for any injury and loss caused by operation against requirements.

1.1 Safety issues

1.1.1 Before installation:

MSW FI-7500 - Before installation: - 1

Danger

  • If any water in system, lack or damage of component when opening box, please do not install!
  • If any unconformity between packing list and actual object, please do not install!

MSW FI-7500 - Danger - 1

Danger

  • Please move the equipment gently, otherwise it may be damaged!
  • If any damaged driver or frequency convertor missing parts, please do not use! There's risk of injury!
  • Do not touch components of control system with hands, otherwise there's danger of static electricity!

1.1.2 During installation:

MSW FI-7500 - During installation: - 1

Danger

● Install on flame retardant objects like metal and keep away from combustible, otherwise fire may occur
- Do not screw fixed bolts of components at random especially those with red marking!

MSW FI-7500 - Danger - 1

Caution

  • Do not put wire head or bolt in driver, otherwise the driver may be damaged!
  • Please install the driver in place with little vibration and keep out of the sun.
  • When above two frequency converters are put in the same cabinet, please pay attention to installation position to ensure heat dissipation effect.

1.1.3 During wiring:

MSW FI-7500 - During wiring: - 1

Danger

  • Please observe the manual guidance and construct by professional electric engineering staff, otherwise danger may occur!
    ● Breaker should separate frequency convertor and power, otherwise fire may occur!
  • Please ensure that power is at zero-energy state before wiring, otherwise electric shock may occur!
  • Please keep correct earthing of convertor as per standards, otherwise electric shock may occur!

MSW FI-7500 - Danger - 1

Danger

  • Do not connect input power to output terminal (U, V, W) on frequency convertor. Pay attention to marking on wiring terminal and do not wire wrongly, otherwise driver may be damaged!
  • Ensure that all wirings conform to EMC requirements and regional safety standard. All wire diameters refer to suggestions in manual, otherwise accident may occur!
  • Do not connect brake resistor directly between DC bus (+) (-) terminals, otherwise fire may occur!
  • Encoder shall use shielded wire single and ensure reliable earthing for terminal of shielding layer!

1.1.4 Before electrifying:

MSW FI-7500 - Before electrifying: - 1

Caution

  • Please confirm the consistence between voltage class of input power and rated voltage class of frequency convertor; correctness of wiring positions of power input terminal (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W). Check if any short circuit of peripheral circuit connecting to driver and if wiring circuit is tightened, otherwise driver may be damaged!
    ● Neither part of frequency convertor needs withstand voltage test as the product has been tested!

MSW FI-7500 - Caution - 1

Danger

Electrify frequency convertor after covering cover plate, otherwise electric shock may occur!
- Wiring of all periphery accessories shall comply with manual guidance and keep correct wiring as per circuit connection method in manual, otherwise accident may occur!

1.1.5 After electrifying:

MSW FI-7500 - After electrifying: - 1

Danger

  • Do not open cover plate after electrifying, otherwise electric shock may occur!
  • Do not touch driver or peripheral circuit with wet hands, otherwise electric shock may occur!
  • Do not touch any input or output terminal of frequency convertor, otherwise electric shock may occur!
  • When firstly electrifying, frequency convertor will conduct security detection of external strong current loop, and do not touch U, V, W wiring terminal of driver or wiring terminal of motor, otherwise electric shock may occur!

1.1.6 During operation:

MSW FI-7500 - During operation: - 1

Danger

  • Do not touch cooling fan or discharge resistance to feel temperature, otherwise burn may occur!
    ● Non-professional artisan shall not detect signal, otherwise personal injury or device damage may occur!

MSW FI-7500 - Danger - 1

Caution

● Avoid things falling in device during operation of frequency convertor, otherwise damage may occur!
- Do not control driver by turning on or off contactor, otherwise damage may occur!

1.1.7 During maintenance:

MSW FI-7500 - During maintenance: - 1

Danger

  • Do not repair or maintain device when electrifying, otherwise electric shock may occur!
  • Only maintain and repair driver when voltage of frequency converter<DC36V since 2 minutes after outage, otherwise residual electric charge on capacitance may cause personal injury!
  • Those without professional training shall not repair or maintain frequency convertor, otherwise personal injury or device damage may occur!
  • Parameters shall be set after changing frequency convertor, all pluggable plugins shall be inserted and plugged after outage!

1.2 Precautions

1.2.1 Insulation inspection of motor

When firstly using motor, using motor again after putting for a long time and regularly checking motor, insulation inspection of motor is essential to prevent damaging frequency convertor due to invalid insulation of motor winding. During insulation inspection, separate motor wire from frequency convertor. 500V voltage-type tramegger is suggested and ensure measured insulation resistance≥5MΩ.

1.2.2 Thermal protection of motor

If selected motor does not match with rated capacity of frequency convertor, especially if rated power is larger than that of frequency convertor, please adjust related parameter values of motor protection or install thermal relay in front of motor for protection.

1.2.3 Operation above power frequency

The frequency convertor offers output frequency at 0Hz\~3200Hz. If users need to operate at above 50Hz, please consider the tolerance of mechanical device.

1.2.4 Vibration of mechanical device

Mechanical resonance point of load device may exist at certain output frequency of frequency convertor, and hopping frequency parameter can be set to avoid.

1.2.5 About heating and noise of motor

Output voltage of frequency convertor is PWM wave containing certain harmonic, so temperature rise, noise and vibration of motor will slightly increase when comparing with power frequency operation.

1.2.6 Voltage-sensitive parts or capacitance of improving power factor exist on output side

Output of frequency convertor is PMB wave. If capacitance of improving power factor or voltage dependent resistor for thunder prevention is installed on output side, instantaneous over current and even damage of frequency convertor can be caused easily. Please do not use.

1.2.7 Switching devices such as contactor for input and output terminals of frequency convertor

If contactor is installed between power and input terminal of frequency convertor, this contactor is not allowed to control the start and stop of frequency convertor. If this contactor is required to control the start and stop of frequency convertor, the interval should be not less than one hour. Frequent charging and discharging will easily reduce the lifespan of capacitor within frequency convertor. If switching devices such as contactor are installed between output terminal and motor, ensure the operation of frequency convertor without output, otherwise module damage may occur easily.

1.2.8 Use beyond rated voltage value

It's not suitable to use this series frequency convertor beyond operating voltage range allowed by the manual, otherwise device damage may be caused. If necessary, please use corresponding voltage boosting or dropping equipment for voltage transformation.

1.2.9 Three-phase input changes to be two-phase input

Do not change three-phase frequency convertor to be two-phase, otherwise fault or damage may occur.

1.2.10 Lightening impulse protection

There's lightening stroke over-current protection device in frequency convertor, so it has certain self-protection ability for inductive thunder. If lightening stroke is frequent in the place of client, additional protection in front of frequency convertor is essential.

1.2.11 Altitude and derating use

In the region with altitude exceeding 1,000m, the heat dissipation effect of frequency convertor weakens due to thin air, so it's necessary to derate for use. Please contact our company for consultation.

1.2.12 About adaptive motor

1) Standard adaptive motor is four-pole squirrel-cage asynchronous induction motor. If it's not above motor, please select frequency convertor as per rated current of motor.
2) Cooling fan and rotor spindle of non-variable frequency motor is coaxial connection. If rotation speed reduces, cooling effect of fan will reduce, so the occasion of overheating motor should be installed with strong exhaust fan or changed to be variable frequency motor.
3) Standard parameters of adaptive motor have been built in frequency convertor. It's necessary to identify motor parameters or modify default value based on actual situation to conform to actual value as far as possible, otherwise operation effect and protection performance may be affected.
4) Short circuit of cable or within motor can lead to alarm and even explosion of frequency convertor. Please firstly conduct insulation short-circuit test for initially installed motor and cable, and it's also essential for daily maintenance. Please completely separate frequency convertor from tested part when conducting the test.

Chapter 2 Product information

2.1 Naming rule

MSW FI-7500 - Naming rule - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SN 200G - OR7 GB - T 4"] --> B["VFD"]
    A --> C["Power Level"]
    A --> D["Mark"]
    A --> E["Adaptable motor (kW)"]
    A --> F["..."]
    A --> G["22kW"]
    A --> H["General type"]
    A --> I["P"]
    A --> J["S"]
    K["Braking Unit"] --> L["Blank"]
    K --> M["B"]
    K --> N["YES"]
    O["Voltage grade"] --> P["I"]
    O --> Q["S"]
    O --> R["three-phase"]
    O --> S["Single phase"]
    T["Voltage grade"] --> U["1"]
    T --> V["2"]
    T --> W["4"]
    X["Voltage grade"] --> Y["110V"]
    X --> Z["230V"]
    X --> AA["380V"]

Figure 2-1 Naming specification

2.2 Nameplate

MSW FI-7500 - Nameplate - 1

text_image MODEL: POWER: 0.75kW INPUT: 3PH AC380V 50Hz/60Hz OUTPUT: 3PH ACOV~380V 0Hz~300Hz 2.4A S/N: Barcode

Figure 2-2 Nameplate

Figure 2-1 Model and technical data of frequency convertor

Model of frequency convertorPower capacity (kVA)Input current (A)Output current (A)Adaptive motor
kWHP
Three-phase power: 380V, 50/60Hz
100615371.53.42.10.751
100615343.05.03.81.52
100615334.05.85.12.23
100615325.910.59.03.75
100615318.914.613.05.57.5
1006153011.020.517.07.510
1006153617.026.025.011.015
1006153521.035.032.015.020

2.4 Technical specifications

Figure 2-2 Technical specifications of frequency convertor

ItemsSpecifications
Basic functionsHighest frequencyVector control: 0~300HzV/F control: 0~3200Hz
Carrier frequency0.5kHz~16kHzAdjust carrier frequency automatically based on load characteristic
Input frequency resolutionNumber setting: 0.01HzSimulation setting: highest frequency ×0.025%
Control modeSVCFVCV/F control
Starting torqueG-style machine: 0.5Hz/150% (SVC); 0Hz/180% (FVC)P-style machine: 0.5Hz/100%
Speed regulation range1: 100 (SVC) 1: 1000 (FVC)
Speed stabilizing precision±0.5% (SVC)±0.02% (FVC)
Torque control precision±5% (FVC)
Overload capacityG-style machine: 150% rated current at 60s; 180% rated current at 3sP-style machine: 120% rated current at 60s; 150% rated current at 3s
Torque promotionAutomatic torque promotion; manual torque promotes by 0.1%~30.0%
V/F curveThree ways: linear type; multipoint type; N^th power type V/F curve(1.2 power, 1.4 power, 1.6 power, 1.8 power, 2 power)
V/F separation2 ways: full separation, semi-separation
Acceleration/deceleration curvesLinear or S-curve acceleration/deceleration way.Four kinds of acceleration/deceleration timeAcceleration/deceleration time range: 0.0~6500.0s
DC brakingDC braking frequency: 0.00Hz~maximum frequency; Braking time:0.0s~36.0s braking action; Current value: 0.0%~100.0%
Inching controlInching frequency range: 0.00Hz~50.00Hz;Inching acceleration/deceleration time 0.0s~6500.0s
Simple PLC, multi-stage velocity operationRealize 16-stage velocity operation at most through built-in PLC or control terminal
Built-in PIDEasy to realize process control, closed-loop control system
Automatic voltage regulationKeep constant output voltage automatically if any change of network voltage
Overvoltage, overcurrent,stalling controlLimit current/voltage automatically during operation, prevent frequent tripping caused by over-current and over-voltage
Fast current-limiting functionReduce over-current fault, protect normal operation of convertor
Torque limit and control“Nawy” character limit torque during operation,prevent frequent overcurrent tripping, closed-loop vector mode can realize torque control
Items Specifications
Individualized functionsExcellent performanceRealize motor control with high-performance current vector control
Operate under instantaneous stopOffset reduced voltage through load feedback energy if instantaneous outage, keep continual operation of frequency convertor within short time
Fast current limitingAvoid frequent over-current fault of frequency convertor
Timing controlTiming control function: set time range 0.0Min~6500.0Min
Multi-motor switch2 sets of motor parameters realize switch control of 2 motors
Multi-threading busSupport two kinds of spot field bus: R S -4 8 5 , C A N li n k
Overheating protectionOptional multi-function card, analog input A13 can receive motor temperature sensor input (PT100, PT1000)
Multi encoderSupport various encoders such as differentiation, open collector and rotary transformer
Programmable by usersOptional user programmable card realizes secondary development
Powerful background softwareSupport parameter operation and virtual oscilloscope function. Realize graphic monitoring of internal status of frequency convertor through virtual oscilloscope
OperationCommand sourceGiven operation panel, given control terminal, given serial communication port. Switch through multiple ways
Frequency source10 frequency sources: given digit, given analog voltage, given analog current, given pulse, given serial port. Switch through multiple ways
Auxiliary frequency source10 auxiliary frequency sources. Realize auxiliary frequency trimming and frequency synthesis flexibly
Input terminalsStandard:5 digital input terminals, in which 1 terminal supports high-speed impulse input at100Hz2 analog input terminals, in which 1 supports voltage input at 0~10V, 1 supports voltage support at 0~10V or current input at 4~20mAExpansion capability:5 digital input terminals1 analog input terminal supports voltage support at 0~10V
Output terminalsStandard:1 high-speed pulse output terminal (open collector is optional), support square signal output at 0~100kHz1 digital output terminal1 relay output terminal1 analog output terminal supports current input at 0~20mA or voltage support at 0~10VExpansion capability:1 digital output terminal1 relay output terminal1 analog output terminal supports current input at 0~20mA or voltage support at 0~10V
Display and keyboard operationLED displayDisplay parameters
Key locking and function selectionPartial or all locking of keys, define function range of some keys to prevent misoperation
Protection functionShort-circuit detection of motor when electrifying, input/output default phase protection, over-current protection, overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection, overheating protection, overload protection
Optional accessoriesLCD operation panel, braking unit, multi-function expansion card, IO expansion card, RS485 communication card, CANlink communication card, differential input PG card, rotary transformer PG card, OC input PG card
Operating environmentUsing placeIndoor without direct sunlight, dust, corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist, water vapor, dropping water or salinity
Altitude< 1,000m
Environment temperature-10°C~+40°C (environment temperature at 40°C~50°C, please derate to use
Humidity< 95%RH, no condensing drops
Virbration< 5.9m/s (0.6g)
Storage temperature-20°C~+60°C

2.5 Outside drawing

mounting hole dimension

2.5.1 Outside drawing

MSW FI-7500 - Outside drawing - 1

text_image Ventiating Fan Panel shell operation panel Middle shell Pan Inverter Nameplate Bottom mounting hole

Figure 2-3 Outside drawing of VFD

MSW FI-7500 - Outside drawing - 2
Figure 2-4 Schematic diagram of external dimension and mounting dimension of plastic structure

MSW FI-7500 - Outside drawing - 3

text_image W A B M N O P Q R S

MSW FI-7500 - Outside drawing - 4

natural_image Technical line drawing of a rectangular enclosure or storage unit with dimensions H, D, and H1 (no text or symbols present)

Figure 2-5 Schematic diagram of external dimension and mounting dimension of metal plate structure

Shell structures of models are as follow:

Model Shell type
Single-phase 220V
0.4kW~2.2kWPlastic structure
Three-phase 220V
0.4kW~7.5kWPlastic structure
11kW~75kWMetal plate structure
Three-phase 380V
0.75kW~15kWPlastic structure
18.5kW~400kWMetal plate structure

5.5.2 Outside drawing and mounting hole dimension (mm) of frequency convertor Figure 2-3

Outside drawing and mounting hole dimension

Model of frequency converterMounting hole (mm) External Dimension (mm)Hole diameterWeight (kg)
A B HW D
10061537114172186125159 5.0 1.7
10061534
10061533
10061532149237218160174 5.0 3.2
10061531
10061530
10061536190305322208192 6.0 6.5
10061535

2.5.3 External dimension of display panel

MSW FI-7500 - External dimension of display panel - 1

text_image 70 16.50 127 128.9 DATA JOG COM JOSER JOSER JOSER JOSER

Figure 2-6 External dimension of display panel

Hole size of display panel:

MSW FI-7500 - External dimension of display panel - 2

text_image 67.3 127.4

Figure 2-7 Hole size of display panel

2.5.4 Dimensional drawing of external DC reactor

MSW FI-7500 - Dimensional drawing of external DC reactor - 1

text_image E F B A Aluminum row C D G

Figure 2-8 Dimensional drawing of external DC reactor

Note: non-standard ones can be customized if any special requirements

Installation way of external DC reactor: when installing frequency convertor, users need to remove the short-circuit copper bar between wiring terminal P1 and (+) of major loop, connect DC reactor between P1 and (+), keep no polarity of wiring between reactor terminal and convetor terminal P1, (+). After installing DC reactor, short-circuit copper bar between P1 and (+) is not necessary.

2.6 Optional accessories

Table 2-6 Accessories of frequency convertor

NameModelFunctionRemark
External brake unitSNBU18.5kW and above external brake unit75kW and above adopts multi-parallel connection
Multifunction expansion cardIO-MINI-V03It can add five figures input and one analog voltage input. AI3 is isolate analog quantity that can connects with PT100 and PT1000; one relay output, one figure output and one analog voltage output with RS485 / CANSuitable for models of 3.7KW and above
I/O expansion card IO1It can add three figures inputSuitable for whole series
MODBUS communication cardRS485With isolating RS-485 communication cardSuitable for whole series
CANlink communication expansion cardCANLINK-V03CANlink communication adapter cardSuitable for whole series
Interface card of differential encoderPG1Interface card of differential rotary encoder, adaptive for 5V power sourceSuitable for whole series
Interface card of rotary transformerPG2Suitable for rotating encoder, driving frequency 10kHz, DB9 interfaceSuitable for whole series
Interface card of open collector encoderPG3Interface card of open collector encoder, with 1: 1 frequency dividing output, adaptive for 15V power sourceSuitable for whole series
Introduced LED operating panelSNKEIntroduced LED display and operating keyboardSuitable for SN series
Extension cableSNCABIntroduced extension cableStandard configuration 3 meter

2.7 Routine maintenance of frequency convertor

2.7.1 Routine maintenance

The influence of environment temperature, humidity, dust and vibration will lead to aging of internal components and potential fault, or reduce lifespan of frequency convertor, so it's necessary to conduct routine and regular maintenance.

Routine inspection items:

1) If any abnormal change of sound during motor operation
2) If any vibration during motor operation
3) If any change of installing environment for frequency convertor
4) If normal work of cooling fan for frequency convertor
5) If overheating of frequency convertor

2.7.2 Regular inspection

Regular inspection items:

1) Inspect air channel and clean regularly
2) Inspect if any loosening of screw
3) Inspect if any arc trace of wiring terminal

2.7.3 Storage of frequency convertor

After purchasing frequency convertor, users should pay attention to temporary and long-term storage:

  1. Put in packaging box of our company as per original package for storage.
  2. Long-term storage will lead to deterioration of electrolytic capacitor. Ensure electrifying once for at

least 5 hours within 2 years, and voltage regulator should be used to gradually increase input voltage to rated value.

2.8 Warranty

Free maintenance only suit to frequency convertor. If any fault or damage under normal use, our company is liable for maintenance for 18 months (since the date of leaving factory and barcode on machine prevails). If beyond 18 months, rational maintenance fee will be charged. Under below conditions, certain maintenance fee will be charged within 18 months: device damage caused by violating stipulations in manual; damage caused by fire, flood and abnormal voltage, etc; damage caused by using frequency convertor for abnormal functions. Related service fee will be calculated as per unified standard of manufacturer. If any contract, the contract will prevail.

2.9 Model selection guidance of braking parts

Figure 2-7 is guidance data. Users can select different resistance value and power based on actual situation (but resistance value should not be lower than recommended value in figure, the power can be large). The selection of braking resistance depends on motor power in actual application system, and it's related to system inertia, deceleration time, potential energy load, so uses can select based on actual situation. The larger the system inertia, the shorter the deceleration time and three frequency the braking will be, so braking resistance should select large power and little resistance value.

2.9.1 Selection of resistancevalue

During braking, regenerated energy of motor is almost fully consumed on braking resistance. Formula is below: U*U/R=Pb

U----braking voltage of stable braking (vary with different systems, generally 700V for 380VAC) Pb----braking power

2.9.2 Power selection of braking resistance

In theory, power of braking resistance conforms with braking power.

Derating to 70% can be used.

Formula: 0.7Pr=PbD

Pr----power of resistance; D----braking frequency (proportion in whole process during regeneration)

Uncoil/Coil ----20 \~30%

Centrifuge----50%\~60%

Casual braking load----5%

10% in general

Figure 2-7 Model selection of braking parts

Model of frequency convertorRecommended powerRecommended resistance valueBraking unitNote
10061537150W≥300ΩStandard built-inNo special instructions
10061534150W≥220Ω
10061533250W≥200Ω
10061532300W≥130Ω
10061531400W≥90Ω
10061530500W≥65Ω
10061536800W≥43Ω
100615351000W≥32Ω

Chapter 3 Mechanical and electrical installation

3.1 Mechanical installation

3.1.1 Installation environment:

1) Environment temperature: ambient environment temperature has great influence on lifespan of frequency convertor, so operating ambient temperature of frequency convertor is not allowed to exceed temperature range (-10°C\~50°C).
2) Put frequency convertor on surface of flame retardant object and leave enough space for heat dissipation around. Large heat produces when the frequency convertor operates. Besides, install vertically on installation support with screw.
3) Install in the place with little vibration. Vibration shall be < 0.6G. Keep away from punch.
4) Avoid installing in the place with direct sunlight, humidity and dropping water, etc.
5) Avoid installing in the oaccasions with corrosive, inflammable and explosive gas in the air.
6) Avoid installing in the place with oil stain, dust and metal dust.

MSW FI-7500 - Installation environment: - 1

text_image Bₙ A A Bₙ

Body installation drawing

MSW FI-7500 - Installation environment: - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of two identical electronic devices with control panels and buttons, no text or symbols present.

Top and bottom installation drawing
Figure 3-1 Installation diagram of frequency convertor

Body installation: A dimension can not be considered if power of frequency convertor is ≤22kW . A shall be >50mm if power of frequency convertor is >22kW.

Top and bottom installation: please install thermal insulation guide plate as per drawing.

Power gradeInstallation dimension
BA
≤15kW ≥100mmNo requirements
18.5kW—30kW≥200mm≥50mm
≥37kW ≥300mm≥50mm

3.1.2 Heat dissipation should be noticed for mechanical installation. Please pay attention to bellows:

1) Install frequency convertor vertically so that heat can dissipate upward, prohibit inverting. If there are multiple frequency converters in cabinet, abreast installation is suggested. For the occasions requiring top and bottom installation, install thermal insulation guide plate as per drawing 3-1.

2) Installation space follows by drawing 3-1 to ensure heat dissipation space of frequency convertor. Consider heat dissipation situation of other components within cabinet.
3) Installation bracket shall be flame retardant material.
4) For the occasion with metal dust, suggest installing radiator outside cabinet. The space of full sealing cabinet should be as large as possible.

3.1.3 Disassembly and installation of lower cover plate

Frequency convertor <18.5kW adopts plastic shell. The disassembly of lower cover plate of plastic shell refers to figure 3-2, 3-3. Push out hook of lower cover plate from inside with tool.

Figure 3-2 Disassembly drawing of lower cover plate of plastic shell

Figure 3-3 Disassembly drawing of lower cover plate of metal plate shell

Frequency convertor >18.5kW adopts metal plate shell. The disassembly of lower cover plate of metal plate shell refers to figure 3-3. Unscrew the screw on lower cover plate directly with tool.

Danger

- When disassembling lower cover plate, avoid falling plate from injury to device and body

3.2 Electrical installation

3.2.1 Model selection guidance of periphery electrical components

Figure 3-1 Model selection guidance of periphery electrical components for frequency convertor

Model of frequency convertor(MCCB) ARecommend contactor AMajor loop wiring on input side mm^2 Major loop wiring on output side mm^2 Recommend control loop wiring mm^2
Three-phase380V
1006153710102.52.51.0
1006153416102.52.51.0
1006153316102.52.51.0
1006153225164.04.01.0
1006153132254.04.01.0
1006153040324.04.01.0
1006153663404.04.01.0
1006153563406.06.01.0

3.2.2 Instructions of peripheral electrical components

Figure 3-2 Instructions of peripheral electrical components for frequency convertor

Part nameInstalling Functionaldescription
Air switchFront of input circuitBreak power if any overcurrent of downstream equipment
ContactorInput side of air switch and convertorTurn on/off power of convertor. Avoid frequent on/off operation of convertor through contactor (< twice every minute) or starting operation directly
AC input reactorInput side of convertorPromote power factor on input side; eliminate higher harmonic on input side and prevent device damage caused by voltage waveform distortion; eliminate unbalanced input current caused by unbalance between power phase
EMC input filterInput side of convertorReduce external conduction and radiated interference of convertor; reduce conduction interference from power end to convertor, promote antijamming capability of convertor
DC reactorDC bus side of convertorPromote power factor on input side; enhance efficiency and heat stability of convertor. Eliminate influence of higher harmonic on input side on convertor, reduce external conduction and radiated interference
AC output reactorBetween output side of convertor and motor. Install near frequency convertorOutput side of convertor contains much higher harmonic. If motor is far away from convertor, much distributed capacitance exists in circuit. Certain harmonic may produce resonance in circuit, which will damage insulating property of motor and even motor, produce large leak current and cause frequent protection of convertor. The distance between convertor and motor generall exceeds 50m, suggest installing output AC reactor

3.2.3 Wiring way

Wiring diagram of frequency convertor:

MSW FI-7500 - Wiring way - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Three-phase380V Input power 50/60Hz"] --> B["MCCB"]
    B --> C["R S"]
    C --> D["External reactor"]
    D --> E["MDBU55"]
    E --> F["Brake unit"]
    F --> G["(-)"]
    G --> H["U"]
    H --> I["M"]
    I --> J["Keyboard port"]
    J --> K["J7"]
    K --> L["PG card port"]
    L --> M["Multi-function expansion card port"]
    M --> N["J3"]
    N --> O["J12"]
    O --> P["AOI"]
    P --> Q["GND"]
    Q --> R["FM"]
    R --> S["Open collector 1 (impulse output 1)"]
    S --> T["CME DO1"]
    T --> U["Open collector 2"]
    U --> V["CME"]
    V --> W["T/C"]
    W --> X["T/B"]
    X --> Y["T/A"]
    Y --> Z["Fault contact output AC 25.0V 1.0mA~3A DC 3.0V 1.0mA~1A"]
    A --> AA["OP OP COM 24V"]
    AA --> AB["+24V DI1"]
    AB --> AC["DI2"]
    AC --> AD["DI3"]
    AD --> AE["DI4"]
    AE --> AF["DI5"]
    AF --> AG["COM"]
    AG --> AH["10V Power for frequency setting +10V 10 mA"]
    AH --> AI["AI1 Analog input"]
    AI --> AJ["AI2 Analog input 2"]
    AJ --> AK["GND"]
    AK --> AL["PE (connect shells) 14"]
    AL --> AM["COM"]

Figure 3-4 Wiring diagram of frequency convertor

Precautions:

1) ◎ refers to terminal of major loop, ○ refers to terminal of control loop.
2) Brake resistance needs to be selected based on user demands, see more details in model selection guidance of brake resistance.

3.2.4 Terimal and wiring of main circuit

1) Description of terminal of main circuit for single-phase frequency converter

Terminal markingNameDescription
L1, L2Input terminal of single-phase powerContact poin of single-phase 220V AC power
(+), (-)Positive/negative terminals of DC busInput point of DC bus
(+), PBConnection terminal of brake resistanceConnect brake resistance
U, V, WOutput terminal of convertorConnect three-phase motor
PE ± Earthing terminalEarthing terminal

2) Description of terminal of main circuit for single-phase frequency convertor

Terminal markingNameDescription
R、S、TInput terminal of three-phase powerConnection point of AC input three-phase power
(+), (-)Positive/negative terminals of DC busInput point of DC bus and brake unit
(+), PBConnection terminal of brake resistanceConnect brake resistance
P1, (+)Connection terminal of external DC reactorConnection point of external DC reactor
U, V, WOutput terminal of convertorConnect three-phase motor
PE Earthing terminalEarthing terminal

Wiring precautions:

a) Input power L1, L2 or R, S, T:
b) Wiring on input side of convertor has no requirement on phase sequence. Wiring precautions:

1: (+) (-) terminals of DC bus: there's residual voltage for DC bus (+) (-) immediately after outage. Contact after CHARGE light extinguishes and confirm it's <36V, otherwise there is risk of electric shock.
2: When selecting external braking component, avoid inverse connection of (+) (-) polarity, otherwise it will lead to damage of frequency convertor and even fire.
3: Wiring length of brake unit should not exceed 10m. Twisted pair or tight double-line should be used for parallel wiring. Do not connect brake resistance directly to DC bus, otherwise it will lead to damage of frequency convertor and even fire.

c) Connection terminal (+), PB of brake resistance:

Confirm the model of built-in brake unit, and connection terminal of brake resistance is valid.

Model selection of brake resistance refers to recommended value and wiring distance should be <5m, otherwise frequency convertor may be damaged.

d) Connection terminal P1, (+) of external DC reactor

For the frequency convertor at above 220V37KW and 380V75kW, connection strap between P1 and (+) terminals needs to be removed when installing DC reactor externally, and connect DC reactor between two terminals.

e) U, V, W on output side of frequency convertor: output side of frequency convertor shall not connect capacitor or surge absorber, otherwise it will lead to frequent protection and even damage of convertor. Due to influence of distributed capacitance, if motor cable is too long, electric resonance will produce easily, which will damage motor insulation or produce large leak current and frequent protection of convertor. If motor cable is >100m, AC input reactor should be installed.

f) Earthing terminal PE

For different models, the marking of earthing terminal may be different, but the meaning is same. In above descriptions, means that earthing marking is PE or .

Keep reliable earthing of earthing terminal and resistance value of ground wire should be <0.1 , otherwise it will lead to abnormal operation and even damage of device. Do not use earthing terminal PE or 12 and N terminal on null line of power in common.

3.2.5 Control terminal and wiring

1) Layout diagram of terminals on control circuit is as below:

(Note: there's no short-circuit strap between CME and COM, OP and +24V of frequency convertor. Users select wiring way of CME and OP respectively through J10, J9)

+10VAI1AI2DI1DI2DI3DI4DI5COM
GNDGNDAO1CMECOMDO1FM+24VOPT/AT/BT/C

Figure 3-5 Layout diagram of terminals on control circuit

2) Functional descriptions of control terminals

Figure 3-3 Functional descriptions of control terminals of frequency converter

TypeTerminal symbolTerminal nameFunctional description
Power+10V-GNDConnect + 10V power externallyOffer +10V power externally, max. output current: 10mABe commonly used as working power of external potentiometer, resistance value range of potentiometer. 1kΩ~5kΩ
+24V-COMConnect + 24V power externallyOffer +24V power externally, be used as working power of digital input/output terminal and power of external sensorMax. output current: 200mA
OPInput terminal of external powerConnect +24V or COM through J9 jumper on control panel.If using external signal to drive DI1~DI5, OP needs to connect with external power, and pull out J9 jumper
Analog inputAI1-GNDAnalog input terminal 11. Range of input voltage: DC 0V~10V2. Input impedance: 22kΩ
AI2-GNDAnalog input terminal 21. Input range: DC 0V~10V/4mA~20mA, depend on J8 jumper on control panel2. Input impedance: 22kΩ for voltage input, 500Ω for current input
Digital inputDI1- OPDigital input 11. Optical coupling isolation, be compatible with bipolar input2. Input impedance: 2.4kΩ3. Voltage range for level input: 9V~30V
DI2- OPDigital input 2
DI3- OPDigital input 3
DI4- OPDigital input 4
DI5- OPHigh-speed impulse input terminalApart from features of DI1~DI4, it can be high-speed impulse input channel. Max. input frequency: 100kHz
Analog outputAO1-GNDAnalog output 1J5 jumper on control panel decides voltage or current output.Output voltage range: 0V~10VOutput current range:0mA~20mA
Digital outputDO1-CMEDigital output 1Optical coupling isolation, bipolar open collector outputOutput voltage range: 0V~24V; output current range: 0mA~50mACaution: digital output CME and digital input COM are internally isolated, but short circuit of CME and COM is realized through J10 jumper on control panel (DO1 is +24V drive by default). If DO1 needs to be driven by external power, pull out J10 jumper
FM- CMEHigh-speed impulse outputBe restricted by function code F5-00 “output way selection of FM terminal”As high-speed impulse output, max. frequency is 100kHzAs open-collector output, it’s the same with DO1 specification
Relay outputT/A-T/BNormally closed terminalDrive capability of contact:AC250V, 3A, COSø=0.4DC 30V, 1A
T/A-T/CNormally open terminal

3) Functional description of jumper and auxiliary terminals

MSW FI-7500 - Control terminal and wiring - 1

Figure 3-6 Location diagram of jumper and auxiliary terminals

Figure 3-4 Functional description of jumper and auxiliary terminals for frequency convertor

Jumper markingNameDescription
Auxiliary terminalJ12Multi-function expansion card port28-core terminal, connect with optional cards (I/O expansion card,PLC card, various bus cards, etc)
J3PG card portOptional: OC, differentiation, rotary transformer, etc
J7External keyboard portExternal keyboard
JumperJ4Select jumper to connect PE and GNDSelect if PE connects with GND. In the occasion with interference, connect PE with GND to enhance anti-interference. Connection by default. (As shown in Figure 3-6, short circuit of 1-2 is connection between PE and GND, short circuit of 2-3 is no connection between PE and GND)
J13Select jumper to connect PE and COMSelect if PE connects with COM. In the occasion with interference, connect PE with COM to enhance anti-interference. Connection by default. (As shown in Figure 3-6, short circuit of 1-2 is connection between PE and COM, short circuit of 2-3 is no connection between PE and COM)
J10Select jumper to connect CME and COMSelect if CME connects with COM. No connection by default. (As shown in Figure 3-6, short circuit of 1-2 is connection between CME and COM, short circuit of 2-3 is no connection between CME and COM)
J5AO1 analog output selectionDecide output type of analog output terminal AO1 is voltage or current output. Voltage output by default. (As shown in Figure 3-6, short circuit of 1-2 is voltage output, short circuit of 2-3 is current output)Output voltage range: 0V-10VOutput current range: 0mA -20mA
J8AI2 analog input selectionDecide input type of analog input terminal AO1 is voltage or current input. Voltage input by default. (As shown in Figure 3-6, short circuit of 1-2 is voltage input, short circuit of 2-3 is current input)Input voltage range: DC 0V-10VInput current range: 0mA -20mA
J9Connection selection of OP terminalOP terminal connects +24V or COM through J9 jumper. +24V connection by default. (As shown in Figure 3-6, short circuit of 1-2 is OP and +24V connection, short circuit of 2-3 is OP and COM connection)If using external signal to drive DI1~DI5, OP needs to connect with external power, and pull out J9 jumper

4) Wiring description of control terminals

a) Analog input terminal:

Due to weak analog voltage signal, it's easily influenced by external interference, shield cable is commonly used and wiring distance is as short as possible, which should not exceed 20m as shown in Figure 3-7. In the occasion where certain analog signal is seriously interfered, the side of analog signal source should be installed with filter capacitor or ferrite core as shown in Figure 3-7.

MSW FI-7500 - a) Analog input terminal: - 1

text_image Less than 20 meters Potentiometer VFD +10V AI1 GND PE

Figure 3-7 Wiring diagram of analog input terminal

MSW FI-7500 - a) Analog input terminal: - 2

text_image cross or wind 2~3 turns in same direction External analog source 0.022uF , 50V Ferrite core VFD AI1 GND

Figure 3-8 Treatment wiring diagram of analog input terminal

b) Digital input terminal: wiring method of DI terminal

Shield cable is commonly used and wiring distance is as short as possible, which should not exceed 20m. If using active way to drive, necessary smoothing measures should be adopted for crosstalk of power. It's suggested to use contactor control way.

Leak-type wiring way-

MSW FI-7500 - a) Analog input terminal: - 3

text_image +VCC +24V +24V Signal OP DI1 3.3k NPN 3.3Ω 0V DI5 COM External controller Control panel of frequency convertor

Figure 3-9 Leak-type wiring way

This is the commonest wiring way. If using external power, pull out jumper J9 between +24V and OP, connect positive pole of external power to OP and negative pole of external power to CME.

Source-type wiring way

MSW FI-7500 - a) Analog input terminal: - 4

text_image -VCC +24V +24V 3.3Ω PNP 信号 0V External controller DI1 3.3k OP DI5 3.3k COM Control panel of frequency convertor

Figure 3-10 Source-type wiring way

This kind of wiring way needs to jump OP of jumper J9 to COM, connect +24V to common port of external controller. If using external power, connect negative pole of external power to OP. c ) DO digital output terminal: if digital output terminal needs to drive relay, absorber diode should be installed on two sides of relay coil, otherwise DC 24V power may be damaged.

Caution: install the polarity of absorber diode correctly as shown in Figure 3-11. Otherwise, if any output of digital output terminal, it will damage DC 24V power immediately.

MSW FI-7500 - a) Analog input terminal: - 5

text_image VFD +24v DO Relay Diode CME COM

Figure 3-11 Wiring diagram of digital output terminal

Chapter 4 Operation and Display

4.1 Interface introductions of operation and display

The operating panel can modify the function parameters of frequency converter, monitor the working status of the frequency converter, control the running of the frequency converter (start, halt), etc. The exterior and function area are shown as below:

MSW FI-7500 - Interface introductions of operation and display - 1

text_image Command indicator Running indicator Numerical display area RUN LOC/REM PWOREV TUNG/RC Forward /reverse indicator light Fault / tuning indicator Unit indicator light H0 A V MOTOR DRIVE Confirm indicator light DATA ENTER Increasing Decline JOG key JOG Shift key Run RUN QSM STOP RESET Stop/Reset Menu mode selection button

Figure 4-1 Schematic diagram of operation panel

1) Instructions of function indicator light:

RUN: When the light is off, it means the converter is in halt state. When the light is bright, it means the converter is in running state.

LOCAL / REMOT: Keyboard operation, terminal operation and remote operation (communication control) indicating light. When the light is off, it means the keyboard operation control state. If the light is bright, it means terminal operation control state. If the light flickers, it means it is in remote control state.

FWD / REV: Reversing light, when the light is bright it means it is in normal running state.

TUNE / TC: Tune / Torque Control / Fault Indicating Lamp, bright light means it is in torque control mode. Slow flickering light means it is in tune state. Fast flickering light means it is in fault state.

2) Unit indicator light:

Hz: frequency unit

A: current unit

V: voltage unit

RMP (Hz+A) Rotate speed unit % (A+V)

Percentage

3) Digital display:

5-bit LED display displays setting frequency, output frequency, kinds of monitoring data and warning code, etc.

4) Instructions of keyboard button

Table 4-1 Keyboard function

KeyNameFunction
DATAProgramming keyEnter or exit first-level menu
ENTEREnter keyEnter menu step-by-step, set parameters and confirm them
DK08Increasing keyIncremental data or function code
XXWZDecreasing keyDecrement data or function code
MSW FI-7500 - Interface introductions of operation and display - 2Shift keyIn the stop display interface and running display interface, you can cycle through display parameters; when modifying parameters, you can modify the parameters of the bit
RUNRunning keyIn keyboard mode, used to run the operation
STOP/RESTStop / ResetWhen running, press this button can be used to stop the operation; fault alarm state, it can be used to reset the key features that restrict the function code P7-02
QSMMenu mode selection keyFunction switch based on PP-03
JOGJog KeyFunction switch based on P7-01, defined as command source or quickly switch direction

4.2 Viewing and modifying methods of function code

Operation panel, frequency converter adopts three-level menu structure for parameter settings and other operations. Three-level menus are: function parameter group (first level)→function code (second level)→function code setting (second level). Operational flow is shown in Figure 4-2.

MSW FI-7500 - Viewing and modifying methods of function code - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Zero-level menu"] -->|DATA| B["First-level menu"]
    B -->|DATA| C["Second-level menu"]
    C -->|ENTER| D["second-level menu"]
    B -->|DATA| E["Δ ▽ ENTER"]
    C -->|Δ ▽ ENTER| F["Δ ▽"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Figure 4-2 Flow chart of three-level menus

Instructions: when operating second-level menu, press the DATA key or ENTER key to return to the second-level menu. The difference is: press ENTER to save the setup parameter and return to the second-level menu, and then automatically shift to the next function code; press the SET key will directly return to the second-level menu without saving the parameters, and return to the current function code.

Example: the function code P3-02 is set to change from 10.00Hz

15.00Hz. (Bold text indicates the flashing bit)

MSW FI-7500 - Viewing and modifying methods of function code - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["50.00"] -->|DAT| B["P0"]
    B -->|Δ| C["P3"]
    C -->|ENTER| D["P3-00"]
    D -->|Δ| E["P3-02"]
    E -->|ENTER| F["010.00"]
    F -->|Δ| G["015.00"]
    G -->|DATA| H["P3"]
    H -->|DATA| I["P3-03"]
    I -->|ENTER| J["015.00"]

Under status of second-level menu, if there is no flashing bit for parameters, the function code can't be modified, and the possible reasons are below:

1) The function code is parameter that can't be modified, such as actual detection parameter and

operation record parameter, etc.

2) The function code can't be modified under running status, and it can only be modified afterhalting.

4.3 Parameter display mode

Parameter display mode is mainly set for users to view functional parameters with different spread patterns based on actual demand, and there are three parameter display modes.

Name Description
Functional parameter modeDisplay functional parameters of frequency convertor in order, including P0~PF, A0~AF, U0~UF functional parameter
User-defined parameter modeUser-defined functional parameters (define 32 parameters at most), users can confirm functional parameters to be displayed through PE group
User-modified parameter modeFunctional parameters being not consistent with factor default

Related functional parameters are PP-02 and PP-03 as below:

PP-02Functional parameter mode display propertyFactory default11
Setting rangeUnitU group display selection
0Not display
1 Display
DecadeA group display selection
0Not display
1 Display
PP-03Defined parameter mode display selectionFactory default00
Setting rangeUnitUser-defined parameter display selection
0 Not display
1Display
DecadeUser-modified parameter display selection
0 Not display
1Display

If defined parameter mode display selection (PP-03) exists to be one display, different parameter display modes can be switched through QSM key.

Display code of each parameter display mode is as below:

Parameter display mode Display
Functional parameter mode- bASE
User-defined parameter mode-115Fr
User-modified parameter mode-- [ --

Switching mode is as follows:

The current way for function parameters, switch to a custom parameters

MSW FI-7500 - Parameter display mode - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["P0"] --> B["-USEr"]
    B --> C["P0-01"]
    C -->|ENTER| B
    B -->|The keys| A
    C -->|The keyboard display| A

4.4 user customization parameters

The establishment of the user's customized menu is mainly to facilitate users to view and modify the commonly used functional parameters. The parameters of customized menu display in the form of "uP3-02", it is said that the function of parameter P3-02 in the custom menu to modify the parameters and modify the parameters of the effect of the corresponding programming in general condition is the same.

User customized menu function parameters from the PE group, by the PE group to select the functional parameters, set to P0-00 is not selected

Choose, can be set to 30; if the menu when the display "NULL", which means that the user to customize the menu.

When the initial user custom menu has been deposited in the commonly used 16 parameters to facilitate the user to use:

P0-01: control modeP0-02: command source selection
P0-03: dominant frequency source selectionP0-07: frequency source selection
P0-08: preset frequencyP0-17: acceleration time
P0-18: deceleration timeP3-00:V/F curve setting
P3-01: torque boostP4-00:DI1 terminal function selection
P4-01:DI2 terminal function selectionP4-02:DI3 terminal function selection
P5-04:DO1 output selectionP5-07:AO1 output selection
P6-00: start modeP6-10: stop mode

Users can according to their own specific needs to be customized for the user to edit.

4.5 Method for viewing state parameter

Under the outage or running state, Through the shift key“▷”Can display a variety of state parameter, respectively. By the function code P7-03 (running parameters 1), P7-04 (operation parameters (2), P7-05 (parameters) downtime by binary bit choose whether to display the parameters.

In stop state, with a total of 16 parameters can choose whether show stop condition respectively: set frequency, bus electric pressure, DI input state, the DO output state, voltage analog input AI1, AI2 analog input voltage, the analog input voltage AI3, actual count value, the actual length value, PLC operation step, load speed display, PID setting, PULSE input PULSE frequency and three reserve parameters, switch input sequences show that the selected parameters.

In running state, the running state of the five parameters: Operating frequency, set frequency, busbar voltage, output voltage, output current for the default display, other display parameters: Output power, output torque, DI input state, the DO output state, voltage analog input AI1, AI2 analog input voltage, the analog input voltage AI3, actual count value, the actual length value, linear velocity, PID, PID feedback is displayed by the function code P7-03, P7-04 bitwise (converted to binary) selection, switch input sequences show that the selected parameters.

Inverter power again to electricity, the display parameter is the default for inverter power lost before the choice of parameters.

4.6 Password settings

Frequency converter provides the user password protection function, when the PP - 00 is set to zero, is the user's password, exit function code editor state password protection is effective, once again, press the DATA, will show "-- -- -- -- --", input user password must be correct, can enter ordinary menu, otherwise unable to enter.

If you want to cancel the password protection function, it is only through the password to enter, and PP - 00 to 0.

4.7 Automatic tuning of motor parameters

Choose the vector control operation mode, in front of the frequency converter operation, must be accurate input motor nameplate parameters, this frequency converter on the basis of standard motor nameplate parameters matching parameters; Vector control method of motor parameters dependence is very strong, to get good control performance, must be charged with the accurate parameters of the machine.

Motor parameters automatic tuning steps are as follows:

Will first command source (P0-02) choice for operation panel command channel. Then please click the parameters of the motor under the actual parameter input (according to the current motor choice):

Motor selectionparameter
Motor 1P1-00: motor type selection P1-01: motor rated power P1-02: motor rated voltage P1-03: the motor rated current P1-04: motor rated frequency P1-05: motor rated speed
Motor 2A2-00: motor types to choose A2-01: motor rated power A2-02: motor rated voltage A2-03: the motor rated current A2-04: A2-05: motor rated frequency motor rated speed

If the motor can be completely off load, and then the P1-37 (motor 2 A2 \ to 37) please select 2 (asynchronous machine complete tuning), and then press the RUN key on the keyboard panel, the inverter will automatically calculate the motor of the following parameters:

Motor selectionparameter
Motor 1P1-06: synchronous machine stator resistance P1-07:synchronous machine D axis inductance P1-08: synchro Q axis inductance P1-09: mutual inductance of the asynchronous motorP1-10: asynchronous motor no-load current
Motor 2A2-06: synchronous machine stator resistance A2-07:synchronous machine D axis inductanceA2-08: synchro Q axis inductance A1-09: mutual inductance of the asynchronous motorA1-10: asynchronous motor no-load current

The motor parameters are automatically tuned.

If the motor and the load can not be completely torn off, then P1-37 (motor 2 A2-37) select 1 (asynchronous machine, static tuning) and then press the RUN key on the keyboard panel

Chapter 5 Functional parameter table

PP-00 is set to be non-zero value, namely setting the parameter protection password. Under mode of functional parameter amd user-modified parameter, the parameter menu can only be accessed after entering correct password. To cancel the password, PP-00 needs to be set as 0.

Parameter menu under mode of user-modified parameter is not protected with password. P group and A group are basic function parameters, U group is monitoring parameter. The symbols in functional table are as follows:

“☆”: It indicates the set value of the parameter can be changed under halt and running status of frequency convertor;

“★”: It indicates the set value of the parameter can not be changed under running status of frequency convertor;

“●”: It indicates the value of this parameter is the actually measured value and can not be changed;

“*”: It indicates that the parameter is “factory default” and can only be set by the manufacturer, and users are prohibited to operate;

Table of basic functional parameters

CodeNameSetting rangeDefaultChange
P0 basic function group
P0-00G / P Display type1: G Type (Constant torque load model)2: P Type (Fan and pump load model)Depend on machine type
P0-01 1^st motor control mode0: No speed Sensor vector control (SVC)1: Speed sensor vector control (FVC)2: V / F control0
P0-02Command source selection0: Operation panel CMD channel (LED off)1: Terminal CMD channel (LED lights)2: Cmd channel (LED flashes)0
P0-03Main frequency source X selection0: Digital setting (Preset frequency P0-08, UP / DOWN can be modified, memory after power failure)1: Digital setting (Preset frequency P0-08, UP / DOWN can be modified, no memory after power failure)2: AI13: AI24: AI35: PULSE setting (DI5)6: Multi-stage command7: Simple PLC8: PID9: Communication given0
P0-04Auxiliary frequency source Y selectionSame as P0-03 (Main frequency source X selection)0
P0-05Auxiliary superimposed frequency source Y range selection0 : Relative to the maximum frequency1 : Relative to frequency source X0
P0-06Auxiliary superimposed frequency source Y range selection0%~150%100%
CodeNameSetting rangeDefaultChange
P0-07Frequency source superimposed selectionBits: Frequency source selection0: Main frequency source X1: Main and auxiliary operation result (Operation relation depends on decimal)2: Switch of main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y3: Main frequency source X, main and auxiliary operation result switch4: Auxiliary frequency source Y, main and auxiliary operation result switchDecimal: operation relation of main and auxiliary frequency source0: Main + auxiliary1: Main-auxiliary2: Max. of the two3: Min. of the two00
P0-08Preset frequency0.00Hz~maximum frequency (P0-10)50.00Hz
P0-09Running direction0 : Same direction1 : Opposite direction0
P0-10Maximum frequency50.00Hz~600.00Hz50.00Hz
P0-11Upper frequency source0: P0-12 setting1: AI1; 2: AI2; 3: AI3; 4: PULSE setting5: Communication given0
P0-12Upper frequencyUpper frequency P0-14~maximum frequency P0-1050.00Hz
P0-13Upper frequency offset0.00Hz~maximum frequency P0-100.00Hz
P0-14Lower frequency0.00Hz~upper frequency P0-120.00Hz
P0-15Carrier frequency0.5kHz~16.0kHzmachine type
P0-16carrier frequency adjusts with temperature0: no1: yes1
P0-17Acceleration time 10.00s~65000smachine type
P0-18Deceleration time 10.00s~65000smachine type
P0-19Acceleration/Deceleration time unit0: 1s1: 0.1s2: 0.01s1
P0-21Auxiliary superimposed frequency source bias frequency0.00Hz~maximum frequency P0-100.00Hz
P0-22Resolution frequency command1: 0.1Hz2: 0.01Hz2
P0-23Digital setting frequency stop memory selection0: no memory 1: memory0
P0-24Motor selection0: Motor 1, 1: Motor 20
P0-25Acceleration/Deceleration time reference frequencies0: maximum frequency (P0-10)1: Set frequency2: 100Hz0
P0-26Frequency command in operation UP/DOWN standard0: Operating frequency, 1: Set frequency0
CodeNameSetting rangeDefaultChange
P0-27Frequency source and command source in bundleBits: operation panel command binds frequency source0: Unbound1: Digital set frequency2: AI13: AI24: AI35: PULSE setting (DI5)6: Multispeed7: Simple PLC8: PID9: Communication givenTen bits: terminal command binds frequency sourceHundred bits: communication command binds frequency sourceThousand bits: automatic operation binds frequency source0000
P0-28Communication expansion card type0: Modbus communication card1: Spare2: Spare3: CANlink communication card0
Parameter of 1stmotor in P1 group
P1-00Type selection of motor0: common asynchronous motor1: variable frequency asynchronous motor0
P1-01Rated power of motor0.1kW~1000.0kWmachine type
P1-02Rated voltage of motor1V~400Vmachine type
P1-03Rated current of motor0.01A~655.35A (convertor power <=55kW)0.1A~6553.5A (convertor power >55kW)machine type
P1-04Rated frequency of motor0.01Hz~max. frequencymachine type
P1-05Rated speed of motor1rpm~65535rpmmachine type
P1-06Stator resistance of asynchronous motor0.001 Ω~65.535Ω (convertor power <=55kW)0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (convertor power >55kW)Tuning
P1-07Rotor resistance of asynchronous motor0.001 Ω~65.535Ω (convertor power <=55kW)0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (convertor power >55kW)Tuning
P1-08Leakage inductive reactance of asynchronous motor0.01mH~655.35mH (convertor power <=55kW)0.001mH~65.535mH (convertor power >55kW)Tuning parameter
P1-09Mutual inductive reactance of asynchronous motor0.1mH~6553.5mH (convertor power <=55kW)0.01mH~655.35mH (convertor power >55kW)Tuning parameter
P1-10No-load current of asynchronous motor0.01A~P1-03 (convertor power <=55kW)0.1A~P1-03 (convertor power >55kW)Tuning parameter
CodeNameSetting rangeDefaultChange

Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Functional parameter table

P1-27Encoder line number1~655351024
P1-28Encoder type0: ABZ incremental encoder1: Spare2: Rotary transformer0
P1-30ABZ incremental encoder AB phase sequence0: Forward1: Reverse0
P1-34Pole-pairs number of rotary transformer1~655351
P1-36Speed feedback PG disconnection detection time0.0: no action0.1s~10.0s0.0
F1-37Tuning selection0: No operation1: Static tuning of asynchronous motor2: Complete tuning of asynchronous motor0
Vector control parameters of 1^st motor in P2 group
P2-00Speed loop proportional gain 11~10030
P2-01Speed loop integral time 10.01s~10.00s0.50s
P2-02Switching frequency 10.00~P2-055.00Hz
P2-03Speed loop proportional gain 21~10020
P2-04Speed loop integral time 20.01s~10.00s1.00s
P2-05Switching frequency 2P2-02~max. frequency10.00Hz
P2-06Vector control slip gain50%~200%100%
P2-07Speed loop filter time constant0.000s~0.100s0.000s
P2-08Vector control over excitation gain0~20064
P2-09Upper limit source under speed control mode0: Setting of function code P2-101: AI12: AI23: AI34: PULSE setting5: Communication given6: MIN (AI1, AI2)7: MAX (AI1, AI2)Full scale of 1-7 option correspond to P2-100
P2-10Digital setting of torque under speed control mode0.0%~200.0%150.0%
P2-13Excitation proportional gain0~600002000
P2-14Excitation integral gain0~600001300
P2-15Torque control proportional gain0~600002000
CodeNameSetting rangeDefaultChange

Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Functional parameter table

P2-16Torque control integral gain0~600001300
V/F control parameters in P3 group
P3-00VF curve setting0: Straight line V/F1: Multipoint V/F2: Square V/F3: 1.2 power V/F4: 1.4 power V/F6: 1.6 power V/F8: 1.8 power V/F9: Reserve10: VF complete separation mode11: VF semi-separation mode0
P3-01Torque boost0.0% : (Automatic torque boost)0.1%~30.0%machine type
P3-02Cut-off frequency of torque boost0.00Hz~max. frequency50.00Hz
P3-03Multi-point VF frequency point 10.00Hz~P3-050.00Hz
P3-04Multi-point VF voltage point 10.0%~100.0%0.0%
P3-05Multi-point VF frequency point 2P3-03~P3-070.00Hz
P3-06Multi-point VF voltage point 20.0%~100.0%0.0%
P3-07Multi-point VF frequency point 3P3-05~rated frequency of motor (P1-04)0.00Hz
P3-08Multi-point VF voltage point 30.0%~100.0%0.0%
P3-09VF slip compensation gain0.0%~200.0%0.0%
P3-10VF over excitation gain0~20064
P3-11VF oscillation suppression gain0~100machine type
P3-13VF isolated voltage source0: Digital setting (P3-14)1: AI12: AI23: AI34: PULSE setting (DI5)5: Multi-stage command6: Simple PLC7: PID8: Communication givenNote: 100.0% correspond to the motor rated voltage0
P3-14VF isolated digital voltage setting0V~rated voltage of motor0V
P3-15VF isolated voltage rise time0.0s~1000.0sNote: time for 0V changes to rated voltage of motor0.0s
CodeNameSetting rangeDefaultChange
Input terminal of P4 group
P4-00Function selection of D11 terminal0: No function1: Forward running (FWD)2: Reverse running (REV)3: Three-wire run control4: Forward jog (FJOG)5: Reverse jog (RJOG)6: Terminals UP7: Terminals DOWN8: Free halt9: Reset bug (RESET)1
P4-01Function selection of D12 terminal4
P4-02Function selection of D13 terminal10: Pause operation11: External fault normally open input12: Multi-stage command terminal 113: Multi-stage command terminal 214: Multi-stage command terminal 315: Multi-stage command terminal 416: Acceleration/Deceleration time selection terminal 117: Acceleration/Deceleration time selection terminal 218: Frequency source switching19: UP / DOWN setting cleared (terminal and keyboard)20: Running command switching terminal21: Prohibit acceleration/deceleration22: PID pause23: PLC state reset9
P4-03Function selection of D14 terminal12
P4-04Function selection of D15 terminal13
P4-05Function selection of D16 terminal24: Swing frequency pause25: Counter input 26: Counter reset27: Length count input 28: Length reset29: Torque control disabled30: PULSE frequency input (valid for D15)31: Reserve32: Prompt DC braking33: External fault normally closed input34: Frequency modification enabled35: PID action direction negated36: Exterior halt terminal 137: Control command switching terminal 238: PID integral pause39: Switch of frequency source X and prese frequency40: Switch of frequency source Y and prese frequency41: Motor selection terminal 142: Motor selection terminal 243: PID parameter switching44: User-defined fault 145: User-defined fault 246: Speed control / torque control switch47: Emergency halt48: Exterior halt terminal 249: Decelerated DC braking50: The running time is cleared51-59: Reserve0
P4-06Function selection of D17 terminal0
P4-07Function selection of D18 terminal0
P4-08Function selection of D19 terminal0
P4-09Function selection of D110 terminal
P4-10DI filtering time0.000s~1.000s0.010s
P4-11Terminal command mode0: two-wire 1 1: two-wire 22: three-wire 1 3: three-wire 20
P4-12Terminal UP/DOWN change rate0.001Hz/s~65.535Hz/s1.00Hz/s
P4-13AI curve 1 Min. input0.00V~P4-150.00V
P4-14Setting of AI curve 1 Min. input-100.0%~+100.0%0.0%
P4-15AI curve 1 Max. inputP4-13~+10.00V10.00V
P4-16Setting of AI curve 1 Max. input-100.0%~+100.0%100.0%
P4-17AI1 filtering time0.00s~10.00s0.10s
P4-18AI curve 2 Min. input0.00V~P4-200.00V
P4-19Setting of AI curve 2 Min. input-100.0%~+100.0%0.0%
P4-20AI curve 2 Max. inputP4-18~+10.00V10.00V
P4-21Setting of AI curve 2 Max. input-100.0%~+100.0%100.0%
P4-22AI2 filtering time0.00s~10.00s0.10s
P4-23AI curve 3 Min. input-10.00V~P4-25-10.00V
P4-24 Setting of AI curve 3 Min. input-100.0%~+100.0%-100.0%
P4-25AI curve 3 Max. inputP4-23~+10.00V10.00V
P4-26Setting of AI curve 3 Max. input-100.0%~+100.0%100.0%
P4-27AI3 filtering time0.00s~10.00s0.10s
P4-28PULSE Min. input0.00kHz~P4-300.00kHz
P4-29Setting of PULSE Min. input-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
P4-30PULSE Max. inputP4-28~100.00kHz50.00kHz
P4-31Setting of PULSE Max. input-100.0%~100.0%100.0%
P4-32PULSE filtering time0.00s~10.00s0.10s
P4-33AI curve selectionBit: AI1 curve selection1: Curve 1 (2 point, see P4-13~P4-16)2: Curve 2 (2 point, see P4-18~P4-21)3: Curve 3 (2 point, see P4-23~P4-26)4: Curve 4 (4 point, see A6-00~A6-07)5: Curve 5 (4 point, see A6-08~A6-15)Ten bit: AI2 curve selection, same as above Hundred bit: AI2 curve selection, same321
P4-34AI is below Min. input setting selectionBit: AI1 is below the minimum input setting0: correspond to min. input setting 1: 0.0%Ten bit: AI2 is below min. input setting AI3 is below min. input setting000
P4-35DI1 delay time0.0s~3600.0s0.0s
P4-36DI2 delay time0.0s~3600.0s0.0s
P4-37DI3 delay time0.0s~3600.0s0.0s
P4-38Effective mode selection 1 of DI terminal0: valid high-level1: valid low-levelBit: DI1 Ten bit: DI2 Hundred bit: DI3 Thousand bit: DI4 Ten thousand bit: DI500000
P4-39Effective mode selection 2 of DI terminal0: valid high-level1: valid low-levelBit:DI6 Ten bit: DI7 Hundred bit:DI8 Thousand bit: DI9 Ten thousand bit: DI1000000
Output terminal of P5 group
P5-00Output mode selection of FM terminal0: Pulse output (FMP)1: Switching output (FMR)0
P5-01FMR output function selection0: No output0
P5-02Relay function selection of control panel (T/A-T/B-T/C)1: Operation of frequency convertor2: Fault output (downtime)3: Frequency level detection output FDT14: Frequency arrival5: Zero speed operation (no output halt)6: Pre-alarm of motor overload2
P5-03Relay function selection of expansion card (P/A-P/B-P/C)0
P5-04DO1 output function selection1
P5-05Output selection of expansion card DO27: Pre-alarm of convertor overload8: Count value reaches the set9: Reaching the set count10: Length arrival11: PLC cycle is complete12: Set the accumulated run time13: Frequency limit14: Torque limit15: Ready to run16: AI1>AI217: Upper limit frequency arrival18: Lower limit frequency reaches (running about)19: Brown-state output20: Communication Preferences21: Positioning complete (reserve)22: Location close (reserve)23: Zero-speed operation 2 (shutdown also output)24: Set the accumulated power-on time25: Frequency level detection output FDT226: 1 to the output frequency27: 2 to the output frequency28: 1 to the output current29: 2 to the output current30: The timing to the output31: AI1 input overrun32: Carrying out33: Reverse operation34: Zero current state35: Module temperature reached36: Output current limit value37: The lower limit frequency arrival (stop output)38: Alarm output (continue)39: Pre-alarm of motor overtemperature40: The running time arrival4
P5-06FMP output function selection0: Operation frequency1: Setting frequency2: Output current3: Output torque4: Output power5: Output voltage6: PULSE input (100.% corresponds to 100.0kHz)7: AI18: AI29: AI3 (expansion card)10: Length11: Value12: Communication setting13: Motor speed14: Output current (100.0% is 1000.0A)15: Output voltage (100.0% is 1000.0V)16: Reserve0
P5-07AO1 output function selection0
P5-08Output function selection of expansion card AO21
P5-09FMP maximum output frequency0.01kHz~100.00kHz50.00kHz
P5-10AO1 zero offset coefficient-100.0%~+100.0%0.0%
P5-11AO1 gain-10.00~+10.001.00
P5-12Zero offset coefficient of expansion card AO2-100.0%~+100.0%0.0%
P5-13AO2 gain of expansion card AO2-10.00~+10.001.00
P5-17FMR output delay time0.0s~3600.0s0.0s
P5-18RELAY1 output delay time0.0s~3600.0s0.0s
P5-19RELAY2 output delay time0.0s~3600.0s0.0s
P5-20DO1 output delay time0.0s~3600.0s0.0s
P5-21DO2 output delay time0.0s~3600.0s0.0s
P5-22Valid state selection of DO output terminal0: positive logic1: negative logicBit: FMR Ten bit: RELAY1Hundred bit: RELAY2 Thousand bit: DO1Ten Thousand bit: DO200000
Start/Halt control of P6 group
P6-00Start mode0: Direct start1: Speed tracking restart2: Start pre-excitation (AC asynchronous motor)0
P6-01Speed tracking mode0: Start from stop frequency1: Start from zero speed2: Start from maximum frequency0
P6-02Speed tracking speed1~10020
P6-03Start frequency0.00Hz~10.00Hz0.00Hz
P6-04Start frequency retention time0.0s~100.0s0.0s
P6-05Start DC braking current / Pre-excitation current0%~100%0%
P6-06Start DC braking time/Pre-excitation time0.0s~100.0s0.0s
P6-07Acceleration and deceleration mode0: Linear acceleration and deceleration1: S curve acceleration and deceleration A2: S curve acceleration and deceleration B0
P6-08S curve start section time ratio0.0%~ (100.0%-P6-09)30.0%
P6-09S curve ending section time ratio0.0%~ (100.0%-P6-08)30.0%
P6-10Halt mode0: Deceleration to halt, 1: Free halt0
P6-11Initial frequency of halt DC braking0.00Hz~max. frequency0.00Hz
P6-12Waiting time of halt DC braking0.0s~100.0s0.0s
P6-13Current of halt DC braking0%~100%0%
P6-14Time of halt DC braking0.0s~100.0s0.0s
P6-15Brake usage0%~100%100%
Keyboard and display of P7 group
P7-01JOG key function selection0: Invalid JOG1: Switch of operation panel CMDchannel and remote CMD channel (terminal CMD channel or CMD channel)2: Reversing switch3: Forward jog0
P7-02STOP/RESET key function0: Only in keyboard mode, halt function of STOP / RES key is valid1: under any operation mode, halt function of STOP/RES is valid1
P7-03LED running display parameter 10000~FFFFBit00: running frequency 1 (Hz)Bit01: setting frequency (Hz)Bit02: busbar voltage (V)Bit03: output voltage (V)Bit04: output current (A)Bit05: output power (kW)Bit06: output torque (%)Bit07: DI input stateBit08: DO output stateBit09: AI1 voltage (V)Bit10: AI2 voltage (V)Bit11: AI3 voltage (V)Bit12: Count valueBit13: Length valueBit14: Display loading speedBit15: PID setting1F
P7-04LED running display parameter 20000~FFFF Bit00: PID FeedbackBit01: PLC stageBit02: Pulse Input pulse frequency (kHz)Bit03: Operating frequency 2 (Hz)Bit04: Remaining operating timeBit05: AI1 Before the correction voltage (V)Bit06: AI2 before the correction voltage (V)Bit07: AI3 before the correction voltage (V)Bit08: Line speedBit09: Current power-on time (Hour)Bit10: Current running time (Min)Bit11: PULSE Input pulse frequency (Hz)Bit12: Communication set valueBit13: Encoder feedback speed (Hz)Bit14: Main frequency X display (Hz)Bit15: Frequency Y display (Hz)0
P7-05LED halt display parameters0000~FFFFBit00: Set frequency (Hz)Bit01: Bus voltage (V)Bit02: DI Input StatusBit03: DO OutputstatusBit04: AI1Voltage (V)Bit05: AI2 Voltage (V)Bit06: AI3 Voltage (V)Bit07: The count valueBit08: Length valueBit09: PLC StageBit10: Load SpeedBit11: PID Set upBit12: Pulse Input pulse frequency (kHz)33
P7-06Load speed display coefficient0.0001~6.50001.0000
P7-07Radiator temperature of inverter0.0°C~100.0°C-
P7-08Radiator temperature of rectifier0.0°C~100.0°C-
P7-09Total running time0h~65535h-
P7-10Product No.--
P7-11Software version number--
P7-12Load speed display decimal digits0: 0 decimal places1: 1 decimal places2: 2 decimal places3: 3 decimal places1
P7-13Cumulative power-up time0h~65535h-
P7-14Total power consumption0~65535KWh-
Auxiliary function of P8 group
P8-00Jog frequency0.00Hz~max. frequency2.00Hz
P8-01Jog acceleration time0.0s~6500.0s20.0s
P8-02Jog deceleration time0.0s~6500.0s20.0s
P8-03Acceleration time 20.0s~6500.0smachine type
P8-04Deceleration time 20.0s~6500.0smachine type
P8-05Acceleration time 30.0s~6500.0smachine type
P8-06Deceleration time 30.0s~6500.0smachine type
P8-07Acceleration time 40.0s~6500.0smachine type
P8-08Deceleration time 40.0s~6500.0smachine type
P8-09Hopping frequency 10.00Hz~max. frequency0.00Hz
P8-10Hopping frequency 20.00Hz~max. frequency0.00Hz
P8-11Hopping frequency range0.00Hz~max. frequency0.01Hz
P8-12Reversible dead time0.0s~3000.0s0.0s
P8-13Inversion of control enables0: allow 1: prohibit0
P8-14Operation mode of set frequency being lower than lower limit frequenc0: operate at lower limit frequency1: halt2: zero-speed operation0
P8-15Droop control0.00Hz~10.00Hz0.00Hz
P8-16Set accumulated power-on time0h~65000h0h
P8-17Set accumulated run time0h~65000h0h
P8-18Start protection selection0: no protection 1: protection0
P8-19Frequency detection value0.00Hz~max. frequency50.00Hz
P8-20Frequency detection hysteresis value0.0%~100.0% (FDT1 level)5.0%
P8-21Frequency arrival detection width0.0%~100.0% (max. frequency)0.0%
P8-22If jopping frequency is valid in acceleration/deceleration0: invalid 1: valid0
P8-25Switch frequency between acceleration time 1 and 20.00Hz~max. frequency0.00Hz
P8-26Switch frequency between deceleration time 1 and 20.00Hz~max. frequency0.00Hz
P8-27Terminal jog priority0: invalid 1: valid0
P8-28Frequency detection value0.00Hz~max. frequency50.00Hz
P8-29Frequency detection hysteresis value0.0%~100.0% (FDT2 level)5.0%
P8-30Any frequency detection value 10.00Hz~max. frequency50.00Hz
P8-31Any frequency detection width 10.0%~100.0% (max. frequency)0.0%
P8-32Any frequency detection value 20.00Hz~max. frequency50.00Hz
P8-33Any frequency detection width 20.0%~100.0% (max. frequency)0.0%
P8-34Zero-current detection level0.0%~300.0% 100.0% is rated current5.0%
P8-35Zero-current detection delay time0.01s~600.00s0.10s
P8-36Output current limit value0.0 % (no detection)0.1 %~300.0% (rated current of motor)200.0%
P8-37Output current limit detects delay time0.00s~600.00s0.00s
P8-38Any arrival current 10.0%~300.0%(rated current of motor)100.0%
P8-39Width of any arrival current 10.0%~300.0%(rated current of motor)0.0%
P8-40Any arrival current 20.0%~300.0%(rated current of motor)100.0%
P8-41Width of any arrival current 20.0%~300.0%(rated current of motor)0.0%
P8-42Timing function selection0: invalid 1: valid0
P8-43Timing operation time selection0: P8-44 setting; 1: AI1; 2: AI2; 3: AI3Anolog input range corresponds to P8-440
P8-44Timing operation time0.0Min~6500.0Min0.0Min
P8-45Lower limit of AI1 input voltage protection value0.00V~P8-463.10V
P8-46Upper limit of AI1 input voltage protection valueP8-45~10.00V6.80V
P8-47Module temperature reached0°C~100°C75°C
P8-48Cooling fan control0: The fan operates when running1: The fan has been running0
P8-49Wake frequencySleep frequency (P8-51)~maximum frequency (P0-10)0.00Hz
P8-50Wake-up delay time0.0s~6500.0s0.0s
P8-51Sleep frequency0.00Hz~wake frequency (P8-49)0.00Hz
P8-52Sleep latency0.0s~6500.0s0.0s
P8-53Arrival time setting of operation0.0Min~6500.0Min0.0Min
Fault and protection of P9 group
P9-00Motor overload protection0: allow 1: prohibit1
P9-01Motor overload protection gain0.20~10.001.00
P9-02Motor overload warning coefficient50%~100%80%
P9-03Overvoltage stall gain0~1000
P9-04Overvoltage stall protection voltage120%~150%130%
P9-05Over current stall gain0~10020
P9-06Over current stall protection current100%~200%150%
P9-07To-ground short circuit protection0: invalid 1: valid1
P9-09Auto reset times of fault0~200
P9-10DO action during auto reset of fault0: no action1: action0
P9-11Automatic reset interval of fault0.1s~100.0s1.0s
P9-12Input phase loss protection0: allow 1: prohibit1
P9-13Output phase loss protection0: allow 1: prohibit1
P9-14Type of first fault0: No fault1: Reserve2: Acceleration overcurrent3: Deceleration overcurrent4: Over current constant5: Overvoltage acceleration6: Deceleration overvoltage7: Constant speed overvoltage8: Buffer overload resistance9: Brown10: Convertor overload11: Motor overload12: Input phase
P9-15Type of second fault13: Output phase14: Module overheating15: External fault16: Abnormal communication17: Abnormal contact18: Current detecting abnormal19: Abnormal motor tuning20: Abnormal encoder / PG card21: Abnormal reading/writing parameters22: Hardware exception of convertor23: Hardware exception of convertor24: Reserve25: Reserve
P9-16Type of second (recent) fault26: Running time arrival27: User-defined fault 128: User-defined fault 229: Power-on time is reached30: Carrying out31: Runtime PID feedback loss40: Fast current-limit timeout41: When switching the motor running42: Excessive speed deviation43: Motor overspeed45: Motor overtemperature51: The initial position error
P9-17Frequency of second (recent) fault
P9-18Current of second (recent) fault
P9-19Busbar voltage of second (recent) fault
P9-20Input terminal status of second (recent) fault
P9-21Output terminal status of second (recent) fault
P9-22Convertor status of second (recent) fault
P9-23Electrifying time of second (recent) fault
P9-24Running time of second (recent) fault
P9-27Frequency of second fault
P9-28Current of second fault
P9-29Busbar voltage of second fault
P9-30Input terminal status of second fault
P9-31Output terminal status of second fault
P9-32Convertor status of second fault
P9-33Electrifying time of second fault
P9-34Running time of second fault
P9-37Frequency of first fault
P9-38Current of first fault
P9-39Busbar voltage of first fault
P9-40Input terminal status of first fault
P9-41Output terminal status of first fault
P9-42Convertor status of first fault
P9-43Electrifying time of first fault
P9-44Running time of first fault
P9-47Fault protection action selection 1Bit: Motor overload (11)0: Free halt1: Stop according to stop mode2: Continue to runTen bit: Input phase (12)Hundred bit: Output phase (13)Thousand bit: External fault (15)Ten thousand bit: Abnormal communication (16)00000
P9-48Fault protection action selection 2Bit: Abnormal encoder / PG card (20)0: Free haltTen bit: Abnormal function code reader (21)0: Free halt1: Stop according to stop modeHundred bit: ReserveThousand bit: Motor overheating (25)Ten thousand bit: Running time arrival (26)00000
P9-49Fault protection action selection 3Bit: User-defined fault 1 (27)0: Free halt1: Stop according to stop mode2: Continue to runHundred bit: Power-on time is reached (29)Thousand bit: Carrying out (30)0: Free halt1: Deceleration to stop2: Decelerated to 7% of the rated motor frequency continues to run, When you can not afford to load automatically restored to the set frequency operationTen thousand bit: Runtime PID feedback loss (31)0: Free halt1: Stop according to stop mode2: Continue to run00000
P9-50Fault protection action selection 4Bit: Excessive speed deviation (42)0: Free halt1: Stop according to stop mode2: Continue to runTen bit: Super speed motor (43)Hundred bit: The initial position error (51)00000
P9-54Continue to run frequency selection when fault happens0: In the current operating frequency operation1: Run at set frequency2: Run at upper limit frequency3: Lower limit frequency operation4: Alternate abnormal frequency operation0
P9-55Abnormal alternative frequency60.0%~100.0% (100.0% Corresponding to the maximum frequencyP0-10)100.0%
P9-56Motor temperature sensor type0: no temperature sensor1: PT1002: PT10000
P9-57Motor overheating protection threshold0°C~200°C110°C
P9-58Motor overheating prediction alert threshold0°C~200°C90°C
P9-59Instantaneous power failure action selection0: invalid1: deceleration2: deceleration to halt0
P9-60RetentionP9-62~100.0%100.0%
P9-61Instantaneous power voltage recovery judgment time0.00s~100.00s0.50s
P9-62Instant power cut action judging voltage60.0%~100.0% (standard busbar voltage)80.0%
P9-63Load missing protectionselection0: invalid1: valid0
P9-64Load missing detection level0.0~100.0%10.0%
P9-65Load missing testing time0.0~60.0s1.0s
P9-67Over-speed detection value0.0%~50.0%(max. frequency)20.0%
P9-68Over-speed detection time0.0s~60.0s5.0s
P9-69Excessive speed deviation detection value0.0%~50.0%(max. frequency)20.0%
P9-70Excessive speed deviation detection time0.0s~60.0s0.0s
PID function of FA group
PA-00PID given source0: PA-01 set up1: AI1; 2: AI2; 3: AI34: Pulse setting (DI5)5: Communication given6: Multi-section instruction given0
PA-01PID values given0.0%~100.0%50.0%
PA-02PID feedback source0: AI1; 1: AI2; 2: AI3; 3: AI1-AI24: PULSE setting (DI5)5: Communication given6: AI1+AI27: MAX (|AI1|, |AI2|)8: MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|)0
PA-03PID action direction0: positive action1: negative action0
PA-04PID given feedback range0~655351000
PA-05Proportional gain Kp10.0~100.020.0
PA-06Integration time Ti10.01s~10.00s2.00s
PA-07Differential time Td10.000s~10.000s0.000s
PA-08PID reverse cut-off frequency0.00~max. frequency2.00Hz
PA-09PID deviation limit0.0%~100.0%0.0%
PA-10PID differential limiting0.00%~100.00%0.10%
PA-11PID given change time0.00~650.00s0.00s
PA-12PID feedback filter time0.00~60.00s0.00s
PA-13PID output filter time0.00~60.00s0.00s
PA-14Retention--
PA-15Proportional gainKp20.0~100.020.0
PA-16Integration time Ti20.01s~10.00s2.00s
PA-17Differential time Td20.000s~10.000s0.000s
PA-18PID parameters switching condition0: Not switch1: By DI terminal switch2: Automatic switching based on bias0
PA-19PID parameter switching deviation 10.0%~PA-2020.0%
PA-20PID parameter switching deviation 2PA-19~100.0%80.0%
PA-21Initial PID0.0%~100.0%0.0%
PA-22Hold time of initial PID0.00~650.00s0.00s
PA-23Forward max. of two output bias0.00%~100.00%1.00%
PA-24Reverse max. of two output bias0.00%~100.00%1.00%
PA-25PID integral propertyBit: Integral separation0: Invalid; 1: ValidTen bit: Integral to whether to stop the output limit0: Continued integration1: Stop Points00
PA-26PID feedback loss detection value0.0%: do not judge feedback loss0.1%~100.0%0.0%
PA-27PID feedback loss detection time0.0s~20.0s0.0s
PA-28PID stoppage operation0: Stop operation; 1: Shutdown operation0
Swing frequency, length and count of Pb group
Pb-00Setting way of swing frequency0: Relative to central frequency1: relative to the maximum frequency0
Pb-01Swing frequency range0.0%~100.0%0.0%
Pb-02Kick frequency range0.0%~50.0%0.0%
Pb-03Kick frequency cyle0.1s~3000.0s10.0s
Pb-04Triangular wave rising time0.1%~100.0%50.0%
Pb-05Set length0m~65535m1000m
Pb-06Actual length0m~65535m0m
Pb-07Number of pulses per meter0.1~6553.5100.0
Pb-08Set count value1~655351000
Pb-09Designated count value1~655351000
Multi-stage command and simple PLC in PC group
PC-00Multi-stage command 0-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-01Multi-stage command 1-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-02Multi-stage command 2-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-03Multi-stage command 3-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-04Multi-stage command 4-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-05Multi-stage command 5-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-06Multi-stage command 6-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-07Multi-stage command 7-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-08Multi-stage command 8-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-09Multi-stage command 9-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-10Multi-stage command 10-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-11Multi-stage command 11-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-12Multi-stage command 12-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-13Multi-stage command 13-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-14Multi-stage command 14-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-15Multi-stage command 15-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
PC-16Simple PLC operation mode0: Stop at the end of single running1: End of single running holding final value2: Been circulating0
PC-17Memory selection after power failure of simple PLCBit: memory selection after power failure0: no memory after power failure1: memory after power failureTen bit: memory selection after halt0: no memory after halt1: memory after halt00
PC-18Simple PLC running time of seg. 00.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-19Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 00~30
PC-20Simple PLC running time of seg. 10.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-21Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 10~30
PC-22Simple PLC running time of seg. 20.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-23Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 20~30
PC-24Simple PLC running time of seg. 30.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-25Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 30~30
PC-26Simple PLC running time of seg. 40.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-27Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 40~30
PC-28Simple PLC running time of seg. 50.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-29Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 50~30
PC-30Simple PLC running time of seg. 60.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-31Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 60~30
PC-32Simple PLC running time of seg. 70.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-33Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 70~30
PC-34Simple PLC running time of seg. 80.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-35Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 80~30
PC-36Simple PLC running time of seg. 90.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-37Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 90~30
PC-38Simple PLC running time of seg. 100.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-39Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 100~30
PC-40Simple PLC running time of seg. 110.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-41Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 110~30
PC-42Simple PLC running time of seg. 120.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-43Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 120~30
PC-44Simple PLC running time of seg. 130.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-45Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 130~30
PC-46Simple PLC running time of seg. 140.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-47Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 140~30
PC-48Simple PLC running time of seg. 150.0s (h)~6553.5s (h)0.0s (h)
PC-49Simple PLC acceleration/ deceleration time of segment 150~30
PC-50Simple PLC running time unit0: s (second)1: h (hour)0
PC-51Given way of multi-stage command 00: PC-00 function code given1: AI12: AI23: AI34: PULSE5: PID6: Preset frequency (P0-08) given, UP / DOWN Can be modified0
Communication parameter of Pd group
Pd-00Baud rateBit: MODBUS0: 300BPS1: 600BPS2: 1200BPS3: 2400BPS4: 4800BPS5: 9600BPS6: 19200BPS7: 38400BPS8: 57600BPS9: 115200BPSTen bit: reserveHundred bit: reserveThousand bit: CANlink Baud rate0: 201: 502: 1003: 1254: 2505: 5006: 1M6005
Pd-01Data format0: No inspection (8-N-2)1: Enven parity check (8-E-1)2: Even parity (8-O-1)3: 8-N-10
Pd-02Native address1~247, 0 is broadcast address1
Pd-03Response delay0ms~20ms2
Pd-04Communication overtime0.0 (invalid), 0.1s~60.0s0.0
Pd-05Data transfer format selectionSingle digit: MODBUS0: Non-standard MODBUS protocol1: Standard MODBUS protocolTen bit: Reserved30
Pd-06Communication reads current resolution0: 0.01A1: 0.1A0
User-defined function code of PE group
PE-00User function code 0P0-00 ~ PP-xxA0-00 ~ Ax-xxU0-xx~U0-xxP0.10
PE-01User function code 1P0.02
PE-02User function code 2P0.03
PE-03User function code 3P0.07
PE-04User function code 4P0.08
PE-05User function code 5P0.17
PE-06User function code 6P0.18
PE-07User function code 7P3.00
PE-08User function code 8P3.01
PE-09User function code 9P4.00
PE-10User function code 10P4.01
PE-11User function code 11P4.02
PE-12User function code 12P5.04
PE-13User function code 13P5.07
PE-14User function code 14P6.00
PE-15User function code 15P6.10
PE-16User function code 16P0.00
PE-17User function code 17P0.00
PE-18User function code 18P0.00
PE-19User function code 19P0.00
PE-20User function code 20P0.00
PE-21User function code 21P0.00
PE-22User function code 22P0.00
PE-23User function code 23P0.00
PE-24User function code 24P0.00
PE-25User function code 25P0.00
PE-26User function code 26P0.00
PE-27User function code 27P0.00
PE-28User function code 28P0.00
PE-29User function code 29P0.00
Function code management of PP group
PP-00User password0~655350
PP-01Parameter initialization0: No operation01: Restore factory settings, not including the motor parameters02: Clear History Information04: Current backup user parameters501: Recover user backup parameters0
PP-02Function parameter display selectionBit: U group display selection0: not display1: displayTen bit: A group display selection0: not display1: display11
PP-03Individualized parameter group display selectionBit: user-defined parameter group display selection0: not display 1: displayBit: user-modified parameter group display selection0: not display 1: display00
PP-04Modifying property of function code0: be modified1: not modified0
Torque control parameters of A0 group
A0-00Speed/torque control way0: speed control1: torque control0
A0-01Setting source of torque under torque control mode0: Digital setting 1 (A0-03)1: AI12: AI23: AI34: PULSE5: Communication given6: MIN (AI1, AI2)7: MAX (AI1, AI2) (1-7 full-scale option, the corresponding digital setting A0-03)0
A0-03Digital setting of torque under torque control mode-200.0%~200.0%150.0%
A0-05Positive max. frequency of torque control0.00Hz~max. frequency50.00Hz
A0-06Negative max. frequency of torque control0.00Hz~max. frequency50.00Hz
A0-07Acceleration time of torque control0.00s~65000s0.00s
A0-08Deceleration time of torque control0.00s~65000s0.00s
A1 group
Control of second motor of A2 group
A2-00Type selection of motor0: Common induction motor1: Variable frequency induction motors0
A2-01Rated power of motor0.1kW~1000.0kWmachine type
A2-02Rated voltage of motor1V~400Vmachine type
A2-03Rated current of motor0.01A~655.35A (convertor power <=55kW)0.1A~6553.5A (convertor power >55kW)machine type
A2-04Rated frequency of motor0.01Hz~max. frequencymachine type
A2-05Rated speed of motor1rpm~65535rpmmachine type
A2-06Stator resistance of asynchronous motor0.001Ω~65.535Ω (convertor power <=55kW)0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (convertor power >55kW)machine type
A2-07Rotor resistance of asynchronous motor0.001Ω~65.535Ω (convertor power <=55kW)0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (convertor power >55kW)machine type
A2-08Leakage inductive reactance of asynchronous motor0.01mH~655.35mH (convertor power <=55kW)0.001mH~65.535mH (convertor power >55kW)machine type
A2-09Mutual inductive reactance of asynchronous motor0.1mH~6553.5mH (convertor power <=55kW)0.01mH~655.35mH (convertor power >55kW)machine type
A2-10No-load current of asynchronous motor0.01A~A2-03 (convertor power <=55kW)0.1A~A2-03 (convertor power >55kW)machine type
A2-27Encoder line number1~655351024
A2-28Encoder type0: ABZ incremental encoder1: Reserved2: Resolver0
A2-29Speed feedback PG selection0: Local PG1: Local PG2: Pulse input (DI5)0
A2-30ABZ incremental encoder AB phase sequence0: Forward1: Reverse0
A2-34Pole-pairs number of rotary transformer1~655351
A2-36Speed feedback PG disconnection detection time0.0: no action0.1s~10.0s0.0
A2-37Tuning selection0: No operation1: asynchronous machine static tuning2: asynchronous machine complete tuning0
A2-38Speed loop proportional gain 11~10030
A2-39Speed loop integral time 10.01s~10.00s0.50s
A2-40Switching frequency 10.00~A2-435.00Hz
A2-41Speed loop proportional gain 21~10020
A2-42Speed loop integral time 20.01s~10.00s1.00s
A2-43Switching frequency 2A2-40~max. frequency10.00Hz
A2-44Vector control slip gain50%~200%100%
A2-45Speed loop filter time constant0.000s~0.100s0.000s
A2-46Vector control over excitation gain0~20064
A2-47Upper limit source under speed control mode0: A2-48Set up1: AI12: AI23: AI34: PULSE5: Communication given6: MIN (AI1, AI2)7: MAX (AI1, AI2)1-7 Full-scale option, the corresponding digital setting A2-480
A2-48Digital setting of torque under speed control mode0.0%~200.0%150.0%
A2-51Excitation proportional gain0~200002000
A2-52Excitation integral gain0~200001300
A2-53Torque proportional gain0~200002000
A2-54Torque integral gain0~200001300
A2-55Integral property of speed ringSingle digit: Integral separation0: Invalid1: Valid0
A2-61Control way of 2ndmotor0: No speed Sensor vector control (SVC)1: speed sensor vector control (FVC)2: V / F control0
A2-62Acceleration/Deceleration time of 2ndmotor0: The same as the first motor1: Acceleration and deceleration time12: Acceleration and deceleration time23: Acceleration and deceleration time34: Acceleration and deceleration time40
A2-63Torque boost of 2ndmotor0.0%: Automatic torque boost0.1%~30.0%machine type
A2-65Oscillation suppression gain of 2ndmotor0~100machine type
Control optimization parameters of A5 group
A5-00DPWM switches upper limit of frequency0.00Hz~15.00Hz12.00Hz
A5-01PWM modulation mode0: Asynchronous modulation1: Synchronous modulationv0
A5-02Dead-time compensation mode0: Without compensation1: compensation mode 12: compensation mode 21
A5-03Random PWM depth0: Random PWM invalid1~10:PWM carrier frequency randomdepth0
A5-04Enable fast current-limiting0: Not enabled1: Enable1
A5-05Current detection compensation0~1005
A5-06Brown-point setting60.0%~140.0%100.0%

Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Functional parameter table

A5-07SVC optimization model0: not optimize1: optimization model 12: optimization model 21
A5-08Dead-time adjustment100%~200%150%
CodeNameSetting rangeDefaultChange
AI curve setting of A6 group
A6-00Min. input of AI curve 4-10.00V~A6-020.00V
A6-01Setting for min. input of AI curve 4-100.0%~+100.0%0.0%
A6-02Input of inflection point 1 of AI curve 4A6-00~A6-043.00V
A6-03Setting for input of inflection point 1 of AI curve 4-100.0%~+100.0%30.0%
A6-04Input of inflection point 2 of AI curve 4A6-02~A6-066.00V
A6-05Setting for input of inflection point 2 of AI curve 4-100.0%~+100.0%60.0%
A6-06Max. input of AI curve 4A6-06~+10.00V10.00V
A6-07Setting for max. input of AI curve 4-100.0%~+100.0%100.0%
A6-08Min. input of AI curve 5-10.00V~A6-10-10.00V
A6-09Setting for min. input of AI curve 5-100.0%~+100.0%-100.0%
A6-10Input of inflection point 1 of AI curve 5A6-08~A6-12-3.00V
A6-11Setting for input of inflection point 1 of AI curve 5-100.0%~+100.0%-30.0%
A6-12Input of inflection point 2 of AI curve 5A6-10~A6-143.00V
A6-13Setting for input of inflection point 2 of AI curve 5-100.0%~+100.0%30.0%
A6-14Max. input of AI curve 5A6-12 ~+10.00V10.00V
A6-15Setting for max. input of AI curve 5-100.0%~+100.0%100.0%
A6-24AI1 sets jump point-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
A6-25AI1 sets jump range0.0%~100.0%0.5%
A6-26AI2 sets jump point-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
A6-27AI2 sets jump range0.0%~100.0%0.5%
A6-28AI3 sets jump point-100.0%~100.0%0.0%
A6-29AI3 sets jump range0.0%~100.0%0.5%

Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Functional parameter table

CodeNameSetting rangeDefaultChange
A7-05On-off outputBinary settingBit: FMRTen bit: relay 1Hundred bit: DO1
A7-06Frequency given of programmable card0.00%~100.00%0.0%
A7-07Torque given of programmable card-200.0%~200.0%0.0%
A7-08Command given of programmable card0: no command1: foreward command2: reverse command3: foreward inching4: reverse inching5: free halt6: deceleration halt7: fault reset0
A7-09Fault given of programmable card0: no fault80~89: fault code0
AIAO calibration of AC group
AC-00AI1 measured voltage 10.500V~4.000VCalibration
AC-01AI1 display voltage 10.500V~4.000VCalibration
AC-02AI1 measured voltage 26.000V~9.999VCalibration
AC-03AI1 display voltage 26.000V~9.999VCalibration
AC-04AI2 measured voltage 10.500V~4.000VCalibration
AC-05AI2 display voltage 10.500V~4.000VCalibration
AC-06AI2 measured voltage 26.000V~9.999VCalibration
AC-07AI2 display voltage 26.000V~9.999VCalibration
AC-08AI3 measured voltage 1-9.999V~10.000VCalibration
AC-09AI3 display voltage 1-9.999V~10.000VCalibration
AC-10AI3 measured voltage 2-9.999V~10.000VCalibration
AC-11AI3 display voltage 2-9.999V~10.000VCalibration
AC-12AO1 target voltage 10.500V~4.000VCalibration
AC-13AO1 measured voltage 10.500V~4.000VCalibration
AC-14AO1 target voltage 26.000V~9.999VCalibration
AC-15AO1 measured voltage 26.000V~9.999VCalibration
AC-16AO2 target voltage 10.500V~4.000VCalibration
AC-17AO2 measured voltage 10.500V~4.000VCalibration
AC-18AO2 target voltage 26.000V~9.999VCalibration
AC-19AO2 measured voltage 26.000V~9.999VCalibration
AC-20AI2 measured current 10.000mA~20.000mACalibration
AC-21AI2 sampling current 10.000mA~20.000mACalibration

Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Functional parameter table

CodeNameSetting rangeDefaultChange
AC-22AI2 measured current 20.000mA~20.000mACalibration
AC-23AI2 sampling current 20.000mA~20.000mACalibration
AC-24AO1 ideal current 10.000mA~20.000mACalibration
AC-25AO1 measured current 10.000mA~20.000mACalibration
AC-24AO1 ideal current 20.000mA~20.000mACalibration
AC-25AO1 measured current 20.000mA~20.000mACalibration

Table of monitoring parameters

Function codeNameMin. unit
Basic monitoring parameters of U0 group
U0-00Running frequency (Hz)0.01Hz
U0-01Setting frequency (Hz)0.01Hz
U0-02Busbar voltage (V)0.1V
U0-03Output voltage (V)1V
U0-04Output current (A)0.01A
U0-05Output power (kW)0.1kW
U0-06Output torque (%)0.1%
U0-07DI input state1
U0-08DO output state1
U0-09AI1 voltage (V)0.01V
U0-10AI2 voltage (V)0.01V
U0-11AI3 voltage (V)0.01V
U0-12Count value1
U0-13Length value1
U0-14Loading speed display1
U0-15PID setting1
U0-16PID feedback1
U0-17 PLC stage1
U0-18Input PULSE frequency (Hz)0.01kHz
U0-19Feedback speed (0.1Hz)0.1Hz
U0-20Surplus operation run0.1Min
U0-21AI1 voltage before calibration0.001V
U0-22AI2 voltage before calibration0.001V
U0-23AI3 voltage before calibration0.001V

Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Functional parameter table

U0-24Linear speed1m/Min
U0-25Current electrifying time1Min
U0-26Current running time0.1Min
U0-27Input PULSE frequency1Hz
U0-28Communication given value0.01%
U0-29Feedback speed of encoder0.01Hz
U0-30Display of main frequency X0.01Hz
U0-31Display of auxiliary frequency Y0.01Hz
U0-32View any memory address value1
U0-34Motor temperature1°C
U0-35Target torque (%)0.1%
U0-36Rotating location1
U0-37Angle of power factor0.1°
U0-39VF separates target voltage1V
U0-40VF separates output voltage1V
U0-41Visual display of DI input state1
U0-42Visual display of DO input state1
U0-43Visual display 1 of DI function state (function 01-function 40)1
U0-44Visual display 2 of DI function state (function 41-function 80)1
U0-59Setting frequency (%)0.01%
U0-60Running frequency (%)0.01%
U0-61State of frequency convertor1

Chapter 6 Parameter description

P0 group : Basic function group

P0-00Display of GP typeFactory defaultRelated to machine type
Setting range1G type (load of constant torque)
2P type (load of fan and pump load)

The parameter is just for users to view machine type and can't be changed.

1: be suitable for constant torque load of designated rated parameters
2: be suitable for variable torque load of designated rated parameters (load of fan and pump)

P0-01Control mode of 1^st motorFactory default0
Setting range0No speed Sensor vector control (SVC)
1Speed sensor vector control (FVC)
2V / F control

0: No speed Sensor vector control

The open-loop vector control is suitable for general high-performance control applications. One frequency convertor can only drive one motor such as load of machine tools, centrifuges, wire drawing machine, injection molding machine, etc.

1: Speed sensor vector control is a closed loop vector control. Motor-side must be installed with encoder. The frequency convertor must be mached with the same type of PG card with encoder. It is suitable for high-precision speed control or torque control applications. One inverter can only drive one motor such as load of paper-making machinery, cranes, elevators, etc.
2: V / F control is suitable for the ooccasion with less demand on load, or one frequency convertor drives multiple motors such as fans and pumps load. It can be used for one frequency convertor to drive multiple motors.

Prompt: motor parameter identification procedure is required when selecting vector control mode. Only accurate motor parameters can take advantage of the vector control mode. By adjusting the parameters of speed regulator in function code in P2 group (2 is second group), better performance can be achieved.

P0-02Command source selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Operation panel command channel (LED off)
1Terminal command channel (LED lights)
2Command channel (LED flashes)

Select input channel of control command of frequency convertor.

Control commands of frequency convertor include: start, stop, forward, reverse, jog and so on.

0: Operation panel command channel ("LOCAL / REMOT" Lights off);

On the control panel, the RUN, STOP / RES keys perform running command control.

1: Terminal command channel ("LOCAL / REMOT" Lights on);

Multifunctional input terminals FWD, REV, JOG, JOG, etc., run command control.

2: Command channel (“LOCAL / REMOT” Blinking) Running command is given by the host computer via the communication mode.

When it is selected, communication card must be optional (Modbus RTU, CANlink card, user-programmable control card, etc.).

P0-03Main frequency source XFactory default0
Setting range0Digital setting (Preset frequency P0-08, UP/DOWN is modified, memory after power failure)
1Digital setting (Preset frequency P0-08, UP/DOWN is modified, no memory after power failure
2 AI1
3 AI2
4 AI3
5PULSE setting (DI5)
6Multi-stage command
7 PLC
8 PID
9Communication given

Select input channel of given frequency of convertor. There are 10 main reference frequency channels:

0: Digital setting (no memory after power failure)

Value that its set frequency initial value is P0-08 “preset frequency.” Through the ▲▼ keys (or multi-function input terminal UP, DOWN) to change the set frequency value.

And when the convertor is power-on after power failure, frequency setting value recovers “digital setup preset frequency” as the value P0-08.

1: Digital setting (memory after power failure)

Value that its set frequency initial value is P0-08 “presets frequency”. By keyboard ▲, ▼ buttons (or multi-function input terminal UP, DOWN) to change the set frequency value.

And when the convertor is power-on after power failure, the set frequency is the frequency last power set by keyboard ▲, ▼ keys or terminals UP, DOWN correction is memorized.

It needs to be reminded that P0-23 is “digital setting frequency down memory selection”, P0-23 is used for selecting when the drive is stopped, choose the correction amount or frequency of the memory. P0-23 is related to downtime, and power-down memory is not related. You need to pay attention for application.

2: AI1

3: AI2

4: AI3

It means that the frequency is set by analog input terminal to determine. VFD control panel provides two analog input terminals (AI1, AI2), Optional I / O expansion card provides an additional analog input terminal (AI3).

Among them, AI1 is 0V \~ 10V voltage input, AI2 can be 0V \~ 10V voltage input. It may also be 4mA \~ 20mA current input. It is selected by J8 jumper on the control panel, AI3 is -10V \~ 10V voltage input.

Correspondence between the input voltage AI1, AI2, AI3, the target frequency, the user can freely choose. VFD provides 5 group of correspondence between the curves, including 3 Group curve of linear relationship (2 point correspondence), 2 group of any 4 points curve correspondence. User groups can be set via P4 and A6 group function code.

P4-33 function code is used to set AI1 \~ AI3 three-way analog input. Select any cuve in the 5 group, and then the detailed correspondence of the 5 group of curves please refer to P4 and A6 Group Function Code instructions.

5: Pulse given (DI5)

Frequency setting is given by the terminal pulse. Pulse reference signal specification: voltage range 9V \~ 30V, frequency range 0kHz \~ 100kHz. Pulse reference can only be entered from the input terminal DI5 multifunction.

Relations D15 terminal input pulse frequency corresponding to the set, and set by P4-28 \~ P4-31. The correspondence between the two points is a straight line corresponding relationship. Pulse input corresponding set is 100.0%, which means the percentage of relative maximum frequency P0-10.

6: Multi-stage instruction

When selecting the multi-instruction execution mode, You need to enter the DI terminals via digital composition different states corresponding to different frequencies of the set value. VFD can set up more than four segments command terminal, 16 states four terminals, PC function code can be corresponding to any of 16 “multi-directive”. Multi-directive” is the relative percentage of the maximum frequency P0-10.

DI digital input terminal as a multi-function terminal block command, you need to set the corresponding group P4. For details, please refer to the relevant function parameter of group P4.

7: Simple PLC

When the frequency source is simple PLC, Running frequency of the inverter can be switched to run between 1 to 16 arbitrary frequency command. Retention time of 1 to 16 frequency command and the respective acceleration and deceleration time can be set by the user. For detailed contents refers to relative instructions of PC group.

8: PID

Selection process PID control output is used as the operating frequency. Generally used for on-site closed-loop control process, Such as closed-loop control of constant pressure, constant tension closed-loop control applications and other conditions.

When applying PID as the frequency source, You need to set the PA group “PID function” parameters.

9: Communication given

Refers to the main frequency source is the host computer via the communication mode.

VFD supports two kinds of communication: Modbus. CANlink, These two kinds of communication can not be used.

Communication card must be installed when using communication, VFD two kinds of communication cards are optional, Users need to choose according to their own requirements, And you need to set the correct parameters for P0-28 “communication expansion card type.”

P0-04Auxiliary frequency source YFactory default0
Setting range0Digital setting (Preset frequency P0-08, UP/DOWN is modified, memory after power failure)
1Digital setting (Preset frequency P0-08, UP/DOWN is modified, no memory after failure)
2AI1
3AI2
4AI3
5PULSE setting (DI5)
6Multi-stage command
7PLC
8PID
9Communication given

When auxiliary frequency source is used as independent frequency reference channel (that is to say frequency source X to Y switching), Its usage is same with main frequency source X. Usage instructions can refer to the P0-03.

When the auxiliary frequency source is used as the superposition given (ie frequency source X + Y , X to X + Y switch or Y to X + Y switch), you need pay attention to:

1) When the auxiliary frequency source is digital reference, preset frequency (P0-08) does not work. User via keyboard ▲, ▼ buttons (or multi-function input terminal UP, DOWN) to conduct frequency adjustment. Adjust directly on the basis of the main reference frequency.
2) When the auxiliary frequency source is given by analog input (AI1, AI2, AI3) or pulse input to the timing, 100% corresponds to the input setting auxiliary frequency source range can be set by P0-05 and P0-06.
3) When frequency source is used as pulse input timing, it is similar with analog given. Prompt: Auxiliary frequency source Y selection and the main frequency source X selection can not be set in one channel, That is to say P0-03 and P0-04 are set to the same value. Or it is easy to lead to confusion.

P0-05Auxiliary superimposed frequency source Y rangeFactory default0
Setting range0Relative to the maximum frequency
1Relative to frequency source X
P0-06Auxiliary superimposed frequency source Y rangeFactory default0
Setting range0%~150%

When the frequency source selection is “frequency overlay” (ie P0-07 is set to 1, 3 or 4), These two parameters are used to determine the adjustment range of auxiliary frequency source.

When P0-05 is used to determine object auxiliary frequency range corresponding to the source, selectively with respect to the maximum frequency to be relative to the main frequency source X. If you choose relative to the primary frequency source, the auxiliary frequency source is used as the main frequency range of X changes.

P0-07Frequency source superimposed selectionFactory default0
Setting rangeBitFrequency source selection
0Main frequency source X
1Main and auxiliary operation result
2Switch of main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y
3Main frequency source X, main and auxiliary operation result switch
4Auxiliary frequency source Y, main and auxiliary operation result switch
Ten bitoperation relation of main and auxiliary frequency source
0Main + auxiliary
1Main-auxiliary
2Max. of the two
3Min. of the two

Through this parameter to select the frequency reference channel. Realized by frequency composite primary frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y are given.

Single digit: Frequency source selection:

0: Main frequency source X

Main frequency X is used as the target frequency.

1: Main and auxiliary operation result Main and auxiliary operation result as the target frequency. See the main and auxiliary operation relations function code “Ten Bit” instructions.
2: Switch of main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y. When multi-function input terminal 18 is (frequency switch) invalid, main frequency source X is target frequency. When multi-

function input terminal 18 is (frequency switch) valid, auxiliary frequency source Y is target frequency.

3: Switch of main frequency source X and main & auxiliary operation result. When multi-function input terminal 18 is (frequency switch) invalid, main frequency source X is target frequency. When multifunction input terminal 18 is (frequency switch) valid, main & auxiliary operation result is target frequency.
4. Switch of auxiliary frequency source Y and main & auxiliary operation result. When multi-function input terminal 18 is (frequency switch) invalid, auxiliary frequency source Y is target frequency. When multi-function input terminal 18 is (frequency switch) valid, main & auxiliary operation result is target frequency.

Ten bit: Main and auxiliary frequency source operational relationship:

0: Main frequency source X + auxiliary frequency source Y

Sum of main frequency X and accessorial frequency Y is used as the target frequency. Achieve frequency superposition given feature.

1: Main frequency source X- auxiliary frequency source Y

The difference between main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y is used as target frequency.

2: MAX (Main frequency source X, the auxiliary frequency source Y) Take the maximum absolute value of main frequency X and accessorial frequency Y as the target frequency.
3: MIN (Main frequency source X, the auxiliary frequency source Y) Take the minimum absolute value of main frequency X and accessorial frequency Y as the target frequency. In addition, When the frequency source selection is main and auxiliary operations, offset frequency can be set by P0-21. Offset frequency superimposed on the main and auxiliary operation result to respond flexibly to various needs.
4: MIN (Main frequency source X, the auxiliary frequency source Y) Take the minimum absolute value of main frequency X and accessorial frequency Y as the target frequency. In addition, When the frequency source selection is main and auxiliary operations, offset frequency can be set by P0-21. Offset frequency superimposed on the main and auxiliary operation result to respond flexibly to various needs.

P0-08Preset frequencyFactory default50.00Hz
Setting range0.00~max. frequency (frequency source selection mode to digital setting is effective)

When the frequency source is selected for the “Digital setup” or “terminal UP / DOWN”, the digital frequency inverter function code is the initial setting value.

P0-09Running directionFactory default0
Setting range0Same direction
1Opposite direction

By changing the function code, it can not change the electrical wiring and achieve the purpose of changing the motor rotation. Which acts to adjust the motor (U, V, W) to convert any two lines of the motor rotation direction.

Prompt: After initialization of parameter, motor running direction will restore the original state. Be caution to use it in the condition that after the system is debugged, the motor steering is strictly prohibited to change.

P0-10Max. frequencyFactory default50.00 Hz
Setting range50.00Hz~600.00Hz

VFD analog input, pulse input (DI5), multi-step instructions, etc., as the frequency source is 100.0% relative to the respective scaling P0-10.

VFD maximum output frequency is up to 3200Hz. As to take into account for the frequency resolution and frequency input range for both indicators, it may select frequency instruction decimal places by P0-22.

When P0-22 is selected as 1, the frequency resolution is 0.1Hz. In this case P0-10 is set in the range of 50.0Hz \~ 3200.0Hz;

When P0-22 is selected as 2, the frequency resolution is 0.1Hz. In this case P0-10 is set in the range of 50.0Hz \~ 600.00Hz.

Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Parameter

P0-11Upper frequency sourceFactory default0
Factory default0P0-12 setting
1 AI1
2AI2
3AI3
4PULSE setting
5Communication given

Define the source of the upper frequencies. Upper limit frequency can be set from the digital (P0-12), It can also be derived from the analog input channel. When setting the upper limit frequency analog input, analog input setting's 100% corresponds to P0-12.

For example, when adopting torque control mode in the field of winding control, as to avoid breaking the material and appearing “speed” phenomenon, you can use the analog set frequency caps. When the inverter runs at the frequency upper limit, The inverter remains its running in the upper frequency.

P0-12Upper frequencyFactory default50.00Hz
Setting rangeUpper frequency P0-14~maximum frequency P0-10
P0-13Upper frequency offsetFactory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz~maximum frequency P0-10

When the upper limit frequency is the analog or pulse setting, P0-13 is used as the set value of the offset. The bias frequency and P0-11 set an upper limit frequency superimposed on the set value as the final upper limit frequency.

P0-14Lower frequencyFactory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz~upper frequency P0-12

When frequency command below the lower frequency set by P0-14, the inverter can stop or lower limit frequency operation or zero speed running. What kind of operation mode shall be selected can be (setting frequency below the lower frequency operation mode) set by P8-14.

P0-15Carrier frequencyFactory defaultRelated to machine type
Setting range0.5kHz~16.0kHz

This function adjusts the carrier frequency of the inverter. By adjusting the carrier frequency, it can reduce motor noise, avoid the resonance point of the mechanical system, and reduce interference and line-to-ground leakage current of the inverter.

When the carrier frequency is low, output current higher harmonic component increases, motor loss increases, and motor temperature increases. When the carrier frequency is high, motor loss decreases, motor temperature decreases, But the inverter loss increases, inverter temperature increases and interference increases.

Carrier frequency adjustment will affect the following properties:

Carrier frequencyLow → high
Motor noiseLarge → small
Output current waveformBad → good
Temperature rise of motorHigh → low
Temperature rise of convertorLow → high
Leakage currentSmall → large
External radiated interferenceSmall → large

For different power inverters, carrier frequency's factory settings are different. Although users can modify, but note: If the value of the carrier frequency is higher than the factory set, it will cause the

inverter heat sink temperature increase. In this case the user needs to derating for the inverter, or there is the danger of overheating inverter alarm.

P0-16Carrier frequency adjusts with temperatureFactory default0
Setting range0: no1: yes

Carrier frequency temperature adjustment means when the inverter detects its own heat sink temperature is high, it will automatically reduce the carrier frequency in order to reduce the temperature rise of the inverter. When the heat sink temperature is low, the carrier frequency is gradually restored to the set value. This feature can reduce the chance of inverter overheating alarm.

P0-17Acceleration time 1Factory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.00s~65000s
P0-18Deceleration time 1Factory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.00s~65000s

Acceleration time means the needed time for the inverter accelerating from zero frequency to acceleration and deceleration reference frequency (P0-25 determination). See t1 in Figure 6-1. Deceleration time means the needed time for the inverter decelerating from acceleration and deceleration reference frequency (P0-25 determination) to zero frequency. See t2 in Figure 6-1.

MSW FI-7500 - 9: Communication given - 1

line | Time Point | Output Frequency (Hz) | | ---------- | --------------------- | | t1 | 0 | | t2 | 0 |

Figure 6-1 Diagram of acceleration and deceleration time

VFD provides four group of acceleration and deceleration time. Users can take advantage of the digital input terminal DI toggle. Four group of acceleration and deceleration time set by function code are as follows:

First group: P0-17, P0-18

Second group: P8-03, P8-04

second group: P8-05, P8-06

Fourth group: P8-07, P8-08

P0-19Acceleration/Deceleration time unitFactory default1
Setting range01s
1 0.1s
2 0.01s

As to meet the needs of all types of site, VFD provides three kinds of acceleration and deceleration time units, respectively are 1 second, 0.1 seconds and 0.01 seconds.

Note: When modify the function parameters, Group 4 decimal places will change the displayed acceleration and deceleration time, Corresponding to the acceleration and deceleration time changes, pay special attention to the application process.

P0-21Auxiliary superimposed frequency source bias frequencyFactory default0.0Hz
Setting range0.00Hz~maximum frequency F0-10

The function code is only valid when the frequency source selection is main and auxiliary calculation.

When the frequency source is the main and auxiliary calculation, P0-21, as an offset frequency, And primary and secondary operation are used as the final result of the superposition frequency setpoint to make the frequency setting more flexible.

P0-22Resolution of frequency commandFactory default2
Setting range1 0.1Hz
2 0.01Hz

This parameter is used to identify all frequency-dependent function code resolution.

When the frequency resolution is 0.1Hz when, VFD maximum output frequency can reach 3200Hz. When the frequency resolution is 0.01Hz, the maximum output frequency VFD is 600.00Hz.

Attention: When you modify the function parameters, all the parameters related decimal places of frequency will change. The corresponding frequency values shall also change, pay special attention when using.

P0-23Digital setting frequency stop memoryselectionFactory default0
Setting range0No memory
1 Memory

This function is only effective when the frequency source is set as numbers.

“No memory” means after inverter stops, digital set frequency value back to P0-08 (preset frequency) values. Keyboard ▲, ▼ keys or terminals UP, DOWN frequency correction performed is cleared.

“Memory” means after inverter stops, digital set frequency reserved for the last stop time set frequency. Frequency keyboard ▲, ▼ keys or terminals UP, DOWN conduct correction remains valid.

P0-24Motor selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Motor 1
1Motor 2

VFD supports drag-sharing drive 2 motors application. 2 motors can respectively set the motor nameplate, independent tuning parameters, choose a different control mode, independent setting performance related parameters and others.

Corresponding function parameter group of motor 1 is P1 group and P2 group. Corresponding function parameter group of motor 2 is A2 group.

The user to select current motor through P0-24 function code, you can also switch the motor through the input terminal DI digital. When the function code selection and terminal selection have contradiction, the terminal selection shall prevail.

P0-25Acceleration/Deceleration time reference frequenciesFactory default0
Setting range0Maximum frequency (P0-10)
1Set frequency
2 100Hz

Acceleration and deceleration time means the acceleration and deceleration time from zero frequency to P0-25 setting frequency. Figure 6-1 is the Acceleration and Deceleration Time Schematic.

When P0-25 is selected as 1, deceleration time and frequency related to the set. If setting frequency change frequently, the motor acceleration is changable, so we need to pay attention to the application.

P0-26Frequency command in operation UP/DOWN standardFactory default0
Setting range0Operating frequency
1Set frequency

This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is digital setting.

When keyboard is used to determine the ▲, ▼ buttons or terminal UP/DOWN action, adopt any manner in which the frequency correction is set. That target frequency increases or decreases based on the operating frequency or based on the set frequency.

Difference between the two settings performs significantly when the inverter is in the process of acceleration and deceleration. That is, if the operating frequency and the set frequency of the inverter are not the same, the difference between different parameter selection will be large.

P0-27Frequency source and command source in bundleFactory default000
Setting rangeBitOperation panel command binds frequency source
0Unbound
1Digital set frequency
2 AI1
3 AI2
4 AI3
5Digital set frequency
6Multi-stage command
7Simple PLC
8 PID
9Communication given
Ten bitTerminal command binds frequency source (0~9, same as bit)
Hundred bitCommunication command binds frequency source(0~9, same as bit)

It defines the bundle of three run command channel and nine given frequencies between channels, and it is easy for the realization of synchronous switch.

The above frequencies given channel meaning is same with main frequency source X selection P0-03. See the description of function code P0-03. Different modes can be bundled with the same frequency given channel. When the command frequency source has bundled source, in the effective period of the command source, P0-03 \~ P0-07 set frequency source no longer works.

P0-28Communication expansion card typeFactory default0
Setting range0 Modbuscommunication card
1Spare
2Spare
3 CANlinkcommunication card

VFD provides two kinds of communication. This communication requires an optional communication card before use, and two kinds of communication can not be used at same time.

This parameter is used to set the type of the optional communication card. When the user to replace the communications card, you must set the parameters correctly.

P1 group: Parameters of 1^st motor

P1-00Type selection of motorFactory default0
Setting range0Common asynchronous motor
1Variable frequency asynchronous motor
P1-01Rated powerFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.1kW~1000.0kW
P1-02Rated voltageFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range1V~400V
P1-03Rated currentFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.01A~655.35A (convertor power <=55kW)0.1A~6553.5A (convertor power >55kW)
P1-04Rated frequencyFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.01Hz~max. frequency
P1-05Rated speedFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range1rpm~65535rpm

The code for the motor nameplate parameters, both by VF control and vector control, are needed to accurately set the relevant parameters according to the motor nameplate.

In order to obtain better VF or vector control performance, the need for parameter tuning, and the accuracy of adjustment results, and properly set motor nameplate parameters closely.

P1-Stator resistance of asynchronous motorFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.001Ω~30.000Ω
P1-07Rotor resistance of asynchronous motorFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.001Ω~65.535Ω (convertor power <=55kW)0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω (convertor power>55kW)
P1-08Leakage inductive reactance of asynchronous motorFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.01mH~655.35mH (convertor power <=55kW)0.001mH~65.535mH (convertor power >55kW)
P1-09Mutual inductive reactance of asynchronous motorFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.1mH~6553.5mH (convertor power <=55kW)0.01mH~655.35mH (convertor power >55kW))
P1-10No-load current of asynchronous motorFactory defaultDepend on machine type
Setting range0.01A~P1-03 (convertor power <=55kW)0.1A~P1-03 (convertor power >55kW)

P1-06 \~ P1-10 is asynchronous motor parameters, these parameters generally do not have the motor nameplate, auto-tuning to get through the drive. Among them, “Induction Motor static tuning” can only get three parameters P1-06 \~ P1-08. But the “asynchronous motors complete tuning” can be obtained here except all five parameters, you can also get the encoder phase sequence, current loop PI parameters and others.

When changing motor rated power (P1-01) or the motor rated voltage (P1-02), the inverter will automatically modify the parameter value P1-06 \~ P1-10, and make these five parameters back to the usual standard Y series motor parameters.

If the site induction motor can not be tuned, you may according to the parameters provided by the manufacturer of the motor, input the corresponding function code.

P1-27Encoder line numberFactory default1024
Setting range1~65535

Setting ABZ encoder pulses per revolution.

In the case of speed sensorless vector control mode, you must set the correct number of encoder pulses, or the motor will not operate properly.

P1-28Encoder typeFactory default0
Setting range0ABZ incremental encoder
1Spare
2Rotary transformer

VFD supports multiple encoder types. Different encoders require matching different PG cards. Please choose the right PG card to use.

After installing the PG card, properly set P1-28 according to the actual situation, or the inverter may not operate properly.

P1-30ABZ incremental encoder AB phase sequenceFactory default0
Setting range0Forward
1Reverse

This function code is only valid for the ABZ incremental encoder, which is only valid when P1-28 = 0. For setting phase sequence ABZ incremental encoder AB signal.

P1-34Pole-pairs number of rotary transformerFactory default1
Setting range1~65535

Resolver is the number of pole pairs in the use of such an encoder, you must set the parameters number of pole pairs correctly.

P1-36Speed feedback PG disconnection detection timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0: no action 0.1s~10.0s

It is used to establish encoder disconnection fault detection time, when set to 0.0s, the inverter will not detect encoder disconnection fault.

When the inverter detects a disconnection fault, and lasts longer than P1-36 set time, the inverter alarm ERR20.

P1-37Tuning SelectionFactory default0
Setting range0No operation
1Static tuning of asynchronous motor
2Complete tuning of asynchronous motor

0: No action, which prohibits tuning.

1: Asynchronous machine static tuning for induction motor and the load is not easy to disengage, but not a complete tuning occasion. Before conducting asynchronous static tuning, you must set the correct motor type and motor nameplate P1-00 \~ P1-05. Asynchronous machine static tuning, the inverter can be obtained P1-06 \~ P1-08 three parameters. Action description: Set the function code is 1, then press the RUN key, the inverter will conduct static tuning.

2: Asynchronous machine Complete tuning. As to ensure the dynamic control performance of the inverter, choose full tuning, the motor must be separated from the load to keep the motor for the no-load condition.

Complete tuning process, the inverter will conduct static tuning, and then follow the acceleration time to accelerate P0-17 to 80% of the motor rated frequency. After the holding period, P0-18 Deceleration according to the deceleration time and stop the tuning is performed before the asynchronous machine complete tuning. In addition to the need to set the motor type and motor nameplate parameters P1-00 \~ P1-05, but also need to set the correct encoder type and encoder pulses P1-27, P1-28. Asynchronous machine complete tuning, the drive can be obtained P1-06 \~ P1-10 five motor parameters and encoder AB phase sequence P1-30, vector control current loop PI parameters P2-13 \~ P2-16.

Action Description: Set the function code is 2, then press the RUN key, the inverter will complete tuning.

P2 group: Vector control parameters

Function code in P2 group is only effective for vector control, not for VF control.

P2-00Speed loop proportional gain 1Factory default30
Setting range1~100
P2-01Speed loop integral time 1Factory default0.50s
Setting range0.01s ~10.00s
P2-02Switching frequency 1Factory default5.00Hz
Setting range0.00 ~F2-05
P2-03Speed loop proportional gain 2Factory default15
Setting range0~100
P2-04Speed loop integral time 2Factory default1.00s
Setting range0.01s ~10.00s
P2-05Switching frequency 2Factory default10.00Hz
Setting rangeF2-02 ~ Maximum output frequency

Drive is running at different frequencies, you can select a different speed loop PI parameters. When operating frequency is smaller than the switching frequency 1 (P2-02), the speed loop PI adjustment parameters are P2-00 and P2-01. When the operating frequency is greater than the switching frequency 2, the speed loop PI adjustment parameters are P2-03 and P3-04. Speed loop PI parameters between switching frequency 1 and switching frequency 2 are the two group of PI parameters linear switching. Shown in Figure 6-2:

MSW FI-7500 - P2 group: Vector control parameters - 1

line | Frequency command | PI Parameter | | :--- | :--- | | P2-00 | P2-01 | | P2-01 | P2-01 | | P2-03 | P2-03 | | P2-04 | P2-04 | | P2-05 | P2-05 |

Figure 6-2 Diagram of PI parameters

Through setting the proportional coefficient of speed regulator and integration time, you can adjust vector control speed dynamic response characteristic.

Increasing the proportional gain, reducing the integration time can accelerate the dynamic response of the speed loop. However, the proportional gain is too large or the integral time too small may cause the system to vibrate. Recommend adjustment method:

If the factory parameters can not meet the requirements, then the value of the parameter in the factory on the basis of fine-tuning. Increase the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate; then decrease the integration time, the system has quick response characteristics and small overshoot.

Note: As PI parameters are set incorrectly, it may cause large overshoot speed. Even when students fall overshoot overvoltage fault.

P2-06Vector control slip gainFactory100%
Setting range50%~200%

Speed sensorless vector control This parameter is used to adjust the steady speed precision motor: When the motor load is low to increase the speed parameter, vice versa.

For speed sensor vector control, this parameter can also adjust the load of the inverter output current.

P2-07Speed loop filter timeFactory0.000s
Setting range0.000s ~0.100s

In vector control mode, the speed loop regulator output torque current command, the parameters for the torque command filter. This parameter is generally no need to adjust the speed fluctuations that may be appropriate to increase the filtering time; If the motor oscillation occurs, it should be appropriate to reduce this parameter.

Speed loop filter time constant is small, the output torque of the drive may be volatile, but the response speed is fast.

P2-08Vector control overFactory64
Setting range0~200

During the deceleration, the over-excitation control bus voltage rise can be suppressed to avoid overvoltage fault. Greater the over excitation gains, stronger the suppression has effect.

For conditions that in the inverter deceleration process, it is easier to be over-pressured and sounds alarm, you need to improve the over excitation gain. But if excitation gain is too large, easily lead the output current to increase; you need to weigh in the application.

For the case of small inertia, deceleration of the motor voltage rise does not appear, it is recommended that the over excitation gain is 0; For braking resistance of the occasion, it is also suggested that over-excitation gain is set to 0.

P2-09Speed control mode torque limit sourceFactory default0
Setting range0F2-10
1AI1
2AI2
3AI3
4PULSE Setting
5Communication Preferences
P2-10Torque limit speed control mode digital setFactory default150.0%
Setting range0.0%~200.0%

In speed control mode, the maximum value of the inverter output torque is controlled by the torque limit source.

P2-09 is used to select the source to set the speed limit, when the via analog, pulse, communication settings, 100% corresponds to the appropriate setting P2-10, P2-10 and 100% of the inverter rated torque.

P2-13Excitation regulator proportional gainFactory default2000
Setting range0~20000
P2-14Excitation regulation integral gainFactory default1300
Setting range0~20000
P2-15Torque control proportional gainFactory default2000
Setting range0~20000
P2-16Torque control integral gainFactory default1300
Setting range0~20000

Vector control current loop PI adjustment parameters. The complete tuning parameters in an asynchronous machine or synchronous machine will automatically load after tuning, generally do not need to modify.

What needs to be reminded is that the current loop integral controller, instead of using the integration time as a dimension, but directly set the integral gain. PI current loop gain is set too high, it may cause the entire control loop oscillation, so when current oscillations or torque ripple is large, it can be reduced manually for PI proportional gain or integral gain here.

P3 group-V/F control parameters

The function code only for V / F control is effective. For vector control, it is invalid.

V / F control is suitable for fans, pumps and other general load, or a inverter with multiple motors, or inverter power and motor power quite different applications.

P3-00V/F curve settingFactory default0
Setting range0Straight lineV / F
1MoreV / F
2SquareV / F
31.2 times V / F
41.4 times V / F
61.6 times V / F
81.8 times V / F
9Retention
10VF Complete separation mode
11VF Semi-separation mode

0: Linear V / F. Suitable for ordinary constant torque load.

1: Multi-point V / F. Suitable for dehydration machines, centrifuges and other special loads. At this time by setting P3-03 \~ P3-08 parameters, it can be obtained at any of VF curve.

2: Multi-point V / F. Suitable for fans, pumps and other centrifugal load.

3\~8: VF curve between the straight line between the PF and VF square.

10: VF completely separate mode. Then the output frequency of the inverter output voltage independent of each other, the output frequency is determined by the frequency source. But output voltage is determined by P3-13 (VF isolated voltage source).

VF complete separation mode, Generally used in induction heating, power inverter, torque motor control and other applications.

11: VF semi-separation mode.

In this case V and F are proportional, but proportional to the voltage source by setting P3-13, and the relationship between V and F are also group P1 rated motor voltage related to the rated frequency.

Suppose the input voltage source is X (X is 0 to 100% of the value), the output voltage V F of the relationship between the inverter and the frequency is:

V / F=2*X* (Motor rated voltage) / (rated motor frequency)

P3-01Torque boostFactory defaultModel confirmation
Setting range0.0%~30%
P3-02Cut-off frequency of torqueFactory default50.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz~maximum output frequency

As to compensate for V / F control low frequency torque characteristics, make increase compensation for the low-frequency inverter output voltage. However, the torque boost is set too large, the motor overheating, inverter over-current.

When the load is heavy and the motor starting torque is not enough, it is recommended to increase this parameter. Light can be reduced when the load torque boost. When the torque boost is set to 0.0, the inverter is automatic torque boost, torque boost at this time according to the drive motor stator resistance parameters calculated automatically required.

Torque boost Torque cut-off frequency: Under this frequency, torque boost torque is effective. More than this set frequency, torque boost will failure. See details in Figure 6-3.

MSW FI-7500 - P3 group-V/F control parameters - 1

line | Output frequency | Output voltage | | ---------------- | -------------- | | V1 | V1 | | Vb | Vb |

VI: Manual torque boost voltage
Vb: Maximum output voltage
fl: Manual torque boost cut-off frequency fb: Rated operating frequency

Figure 6-3 Diagram of manual torque boost

P3-03Multi-VF frequencies F1Factory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz~P3-05
P3-04Multi-VF Voltage point V1Factory default0.0%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%
P3-05Multi-VF frequencies F2Factory default0.00Hz
Setting rangeP3-03~P3-07
P3-06Multi-VF Voltage point V2Factory default0.0%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%
P3-07Multi-VF frequencies F3Factory default0.00Hz
Setting rangeP3-05 ~ motor rated frequency (P1-04) Note:second motor rated frequency is A2-04
P3-08Multi-VF Voltage point V3Factory default0.0%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%

P3-03 \~ P3-08 six parameters to define multi-segment V / F curve.

Multi-point curve V / F should be set according to the load characteristics of the motor. What need to be aware of is that, Relationship between the voltage and frequency three points points must be met: V1 < V2 < V3, F1 < F2 < F3. Figure 6-4 is a schematic view of multi-point setting VF curve.

Voltage is set too high may cause motor overheating and even burned at low frequencies, the drive may be too stall or over-current protection.

P3-09VF slip compensation gainFactory default0
Setting range0%~200.0%

VF Slip compensation. It can be compensated induction motor generated when the load increases the motor speed deviation when the load changes the motor speed can be stable.

VF Slip compensation gain is set to 100.0%, indicating that slip when the motor with a rated load compensation to the motor rated slip. But the motor rated slip, the drive motor rated frequency group by P1 and rated speed to get own calculations.

Adjust VF rpm slip compensation gain, generally when the rated load, the motor speed and the target speed is substantially the same as the principle. When the motor speed and the target value is not the same, you need to be properly fine-tune the gain.

P3-10VF over excitation gainFactory default6
Setting range0~200

During the deceleration, the over-excitation control bus voltage rise can be suppressed to avoid overvoltage fault. Greater the over excitation gains, stronger the suppression has effect.

For conditions that in the inverter deceleration process, it is easier to be over-pressured and sounds alarm, you need to improve the over excitation gain. But if excitation gain is too large, easily lead the output current to increase; you need to weigh in the application.

For the case of small inertia, deceleration of the motor voltage rise does not appear, it is recommended that the over excitation gain is 0; For braking resistance occasion, it is also suggested that over-excitation gain is set to 0.

MSW FI-7500 - P3 group-V/F control parameters - 2

line | Frequency (%) | Voltage % Vb | | :--- | :--- | | F2 | V1 | | F3 | V2 | | Fb | V3 |

V1-V3: Multi-speed V / F voltage percentage of segment 1-3
F1-F3: Multi-speed V / F frequency percentage of segment 1-3
Vb: Motor rated voltage Fb: motor rated operating frequency

Figure 6-4 Diagram of multi-point V / F curve setting

P3-11VF oscillation suppression gainFactory defaultModel confirmation
Setting range0~100

The gain selection method is effective in suppressing oscillation, try to take small, so as not to adversely affect the VF operation. When the motor has no oscillation, select this gain as 0. Only when the motor has obvious oscillation only be appropriate to increase the gain, the greater the gain, the oscillation suppression result.

When using the oscillation suppression function requires the motor rated current and no-load current parameters to be accurate, or VF oscillation suppressing effect is not good.

P3-13VF Isolated voltageFactory default0
Setting range0Digital setting (P3-14)
1 AI1
2 AI2
3 AI3
4Pulse setup (D15)
5Multi-step instructions
6Simple PLC
7 PID
8Communication given
100.0% Corresponds to the motor rated voltage (P1-02, A4-02, A5-02, A6-02)
P3-14VF isolated digital voltage settingFactory default0V
Setting range0V ~ motor rated voltage

VF separation generally used in induction heating, power inverter and torque motor control applications. When choosing VF separation control, the output voltage can be set by function code P3-14, but also from analog, multi-instruction, PLC, PID or communication given. When set to a non-digital, each set corresponding to 100% of rated voltage of the motor, when the percentage of the absolute value of the analog output setting, etc. is negative. So places is set as an active setpoint.

0: Digital setting (P3-14) voltage is directly set by P3-14.

1: AI1 2: AI2 3: AI3

Voltage from the analog input terminal to determine.

  1. Pulse setup (DI5) given via the terminal voltage pulse given. Pulse reference signal specification: voltage range 9V \~ 30V, frequency range 0kHz \~ 100kHz.

  2. When multi-source voltage instruction multistage instruction, set the group P4 PC and set parameters to determine if a given signal and the reference voltage correspondence.

  3. Simple PLC

When the voltage source is simple PLC, need to set the PC set of parameters to determine if a given output voltage.

  1. PID

According to PID closed loop generates an output voltage. See details PA group PID introduction.

  1. Communication refers to the voltage given by the host computer via the communication mode. When the voltage source selection 1-8, 0 corresponds to 100% of the output voltage of 0V motor rated voltage.
P3-14VF isolated voltage rise timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~1000.0s

VF separation rise time refers to the output voltage changes from 0V to rated motor voltage required time. Shown in Figure 6-5:

MSW FI-7500 - P3 group-V/F control parameters - 3

line | Time t | Output voltage V | Actual voltage rise time | Actual voltage fall time | | ------ | ---------------- | ------------------------ | ------------------------ | | Start | 0 | 0 | 0 | | Mid | 100 | 0 | 0 | | Peak | 100 | 100 | 100 | | End | 0 | 0 | 0 |

Figure 6-5 Diagram of V/F separation

P4 group: Input termianl

This series inverter comes standard with five multifunctional digital input terminals (Where DI5 can be used as high-speed pulse input terminal). Two analog input terminals. If the system needs more input and output terminals can be optional multifunctional input and output expansion card.

Multi-function input and output expansion card has five multifunctional digital input terminals (DI6\~DI10), An analog input terminal (AI3).

P4-00DI1Terminal function selectionFactory default1 (running)
P4-01DI2Terminal function selectionFactory default4 (positive turning point move)
P4-02DI3Terminal function selectionFactory default9 (fault reset)
P4-03DI4Terminal function selectionFactory default12 (multi speed 1)
P4-04DI5Terminal function selectionFactory default13 (multi speed 2)
P4-05DI6Terminal function selectionFactory default0
P4-06DI7Terminal function selectionFactory default0
P4-07DI8Terminal function selectionFactory default0
P4-08DI9Terminal function selectionFactory default0
P4-09DI10Terminal function selectionFactory default0

These parameters are used to set the digital multi-function input terminal functions can be selected functions as follows:

Set pointFunctionExplanation
0No functionThe terminal will not be used to “No function” to prevent malfunction.
1Forward running (FWD)By external terminal to control forward and reverse drive.
2Reverse running (REV)
3Three-wire run control;This terminal is used to determine the inverter operating mode is a three-line control mode. For details, see function code P4-11 (“terminal command mode”) instructions.
4Forward jog (FJOG)JOG jog forward running, JOG jog reverse running. Jog frequency jog acceleration and deceleration time refer to the function code P8-00, P8-01, P8-02 description.
5Turning points (RJOG)
6Terminals UPBy external terminals a given frequency modification frequency increment, decrement instruction. Frequency source is set to digital setting, can be adjusted up and down to set the frequency.
7Terminal DOWN
8Free stoppageInverter blocks the output, then stop the process from motor inverter control. This way is same with freewheel meaning of the P6-10.
9Reset (RESET)Use terminal fault reset function. And RESET function key on the keyboard. This function is used to implement remote fault reset.
10Pause operationThe inverter is stopped, but all operating parameters are memories. Parameters such as PLC, Wobble parameters, PID parameters. After this terminal signal disappears, the drive back to the state before stopping the run.
11External fault normally open inputWhen this signal is sent to the inverter, the inverter reports fault ERR15, troubleshooting and fault protection according to the operation mode (for details to participate in the function code P9-47).
12Multi-speed terminal 1By 16 states of the four terminals for speed or 16 other instruction set. 16. for details, see Table 1.
13Multi-speed terminal 2
14Multi-speed terminal 3
15Multi-speed terminal 4
16Deceleration time selection terminal 1This four states two terminals, four options to achieve acceleration and deceleration time, for details, see Table 2.
17Deceleration time selection terminal 2
18Frequency source switchingAs to switch to select a different frequency source.According to the frequency source selection function code (P0-07) is set when a set between the two frequencies as the source switching frequency source, this terminal is used to switch between two frequency source.
19UP / DOWN Setting clear (terminal, keyboard)When the frequency of a given digital frequency reference, this terminal can clear frequency terminal UP / DOWN keyboard or UP / DOWN changed, so that a given frequency back to the set value of P0-08.
20Running command switching terminalWhen the command source is set to terminal control (P0-02 = 1), this terminal can be switched terminal control and keyboard control.When the command source is set to the communication control (P0-02 = 2), this terminal can be switched communication control and keyboard control.
21Ramp stop Ensure that the drive is not external signals (except stop command), to maintain the current output frequency.
22PID Time outPID is temporarily disabled, the inverter maintains the current frequency output, no longer frequency source PID adjust.
23PLC State resetPLC pause in the implementation process, is running again, you can restore the inverter through this terminal to the initial state of simple PLC.
24Swing frequency pause Drive to the center frequency output. Wobble function pause.
25Counter input Count input terminal of the pulse.
26Counter reset Counter clearing processing status.
27Length count input Length count input terminal.

Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Parameter description

Set pointFunctionExplanation
28Length reset Length clear
29Torque control disabled Prohibit the drive torque control, the inverter goes into the speed control mode
30Pulse (pulse) frequency input (valid only for DI5)DI5 as a pulse input terminal functions.
31Retention Retention
32Now the DC brakingWhen this terminal is valid, inverter switching directly to the DC braking state
33External fault normally closed inputWhen the normally closed external fault signal into the inverter, the inverter reports fault ERR15 and downtime.
34Frequency modification enabledIf this function is set to valid, when the frequency is changed, the drive does not respond to change frequency, until the terminal state is invalid.
35PID action direction takes opposite directionWhen this terminal is valid, PID action direction and the direction opposite to the set PA-03
36Exterior stoppage Terminal 1When conducting keyboard control, this terminal can be used to stop the inverter, the STOP key on the keyboard equivalent functions.
37Control command switching terminal 2For switching between the terminal control and communication control. If the command source is selected as terminal control, the system switches to the communication terminal effective control; Vice versa.
38PID Points pauseWhen this terminal is valid, the PID integral regulation pause, but the proportion of PID regulation and differential regulation is still valid.
39Frequency source X and preset frequency switchingThe terminal is enabled, the frequency source X with preset frequency (P0-08) Alternative
40Frequency source Y and preset frequency switchingThe terminal is enabled, the frequency source Y with preset frequency (P0-08) Alternative
41Motor selection terminal 1Those two states by two terminals, two sets of motor parameters can switch, for details, see Table 3.
42Motor selection terminal 2
43PID Parameter switchWhen PID parameter switching conditions for the DI terminal (PA-18 = 1), this terminal is invalid, PID parameter PA-05 ~ PA-07; PA-15 is used when the terminal is valid ~ PA-17;
44User-defined fault 1User-defined fault 1 and 2 are valid, the inverter respectively alarm ERR27 and ERR28, the drive will select P9-49 selected operation mode processing based fault protection action.
45User-defined fault 2
46Speed control / torque control switchBetween the drive torque control and speed control modes. The terminal is invalid, A0-00 (speed / torque control) mode is defined in the drive is running, the terminal is valid and then switches to another mode.
47Emergency ShutdownWhen this terminal is valid, the drive with the fastest speed parking, parking during the current limit in the current set. This function is used to meet when the system is in a state of emergency, the drive needs to stop as soon as possible requirements.
48Exterior stoppage Terminal 2In any control mode (the control panel, terminal control, communication control), the terminal can be used to make the inverter is stopped, then the deceleration time is fixed deceleration time 4.
49DC braking decelerationWhen this terminal is valid, the inverter will decelerate to stop DC braking starting frequency, and then switch to the DC braking.
50The running time is clearedWhen this terminal is valid, inverter operation timing of this time is cleared, this feature requires the timed run (P8-42) and run this time is reached (P8-53) with the use.

Annexed Table 1 Multi-section Instruction's Function Description

More than four segments command terminal, it can be combined into 16 states. Each state corresponds to the 16 16 instruction set values. Specifically as shown in Table 1:

K_4 K_3 K_2 K_1 Instruction setCorresponding parameters
OFF OFFOFF OFFMulti segment instruction 0PC-00
OFF OFFOFF ONMulti segment instruction 1PC-01
OFF OFFON OFFMulti segment instruction 2PC-02
OFF OFFON ONMulti segment instruction 3PC-03
OFF ONOFF OFFMulti segment instruction 4PC-04
OFF ONOFF ONMulti segment instruction 5PC-05
OFF ONON OFFMulti segment instruction 6PC-06
OFF ONON ONMulti segment instruction 7PC-07
ON OFFOFF OFFMulti segment instruction 8PC-08
ON OFFOFF ONMulti segment instruction 9PC-09
ON OFFON OFFMulti segment instruction 10PC-10
ON OFFON ONMulti segment instruction 11PC-11
ON ONOFF OFFMulti segment instruction 12PC-12
ON ONOFF ONMulti segment instruction 13PC-13
ON ONON OFFMulti segment instruction 14PC-14
ON ONON ONMulti segment instruction 15PC-15

When the frequency source selection for the multispeed function code PC-00 \~ PC-15 of 100.0%, corresponding to the maximum frequency P0-10. Multi-step instructions except as a multi-speed function, but also can be used as PID given source, or as a voltage source VF separation control, etc., to meet the needs of different between a given value in switching.

Annexed Table 2 Acceleration and deceleration time selection terminal functions

Terminal 2Terminal 1Acceleration or deceleration time selection Corresponding
OFF OFFAcceleration time 1P0-17、P0-18
OFFONAcceleration time 1P8-03、P8-04
ON OFFAcceleration time 3P8-05、P8-06
ONONAcceleration time 4P8-07、P8-08

Annexed Table 3 Motor selection Terminal functions

Terminal 2Terminal 1Motor selection Corresponding parameter set
OFFOFFMotor 1P1, P2 Group
OFF ONMotor 2A2 Group
P4-10DI filtering timeFactory0.010s
Setting0.000s~1.000s

Setting DI status of the terminal software filter time. If you are using the occasion input terminal susceptible to interference caused by malfunction of this parameter can be increased in order to enhance the anti-jamming capability. While this increases filter time can cause slow response DI terminal.

P4-11Terminal command modeFactory default0
Setting range0Two-wire 1
1Two-wire 2
2Three-wire 1
3Three-wire 2

This parameter defines the external terminal through the inverter to control the operation of four different ways.

0: Two-wire mode 1: This mode is the most commonly used two-line mode. By the terminal D11, D12 to determine the motor forward and reverse operation.

Terminal function set as follows:

TerminalsSet pointDescription
DI11Forward running (FWD)
DI22Reverse running (REV)

Wherein, D11, D12 are multi-function input terminal of D11 \~ D110, the level is effective.

MSW FI-7500 - P4 group: Input termianl - 1

text_image K1 K2 Run command 0 0 Stop 0 1 Reverse 1 0 Forward 1 1 Stop VFD K1 D11: Forward run (PWD) K2 D12: Reverse running (REV) COM: Digital common port

Figure 6-6 Two-line mode 1

1: Two-wire mode 2: Use this mode when DI1 terminal function operation enable terminal and DI2 terminal function to determine the direction.

Terminal function set as follows:

TerminalsSet pointDescription
DI11Forward running (FWD)
DI22Reverse running (REV)

Where in, DI1, DI2 are multi-function input terminal of DI1 \~ DI10, the level is effective.

MSW FI-7500 - P4 group: Input termianl - 2

text_image K1 K2 Run command 0 0 Stop 0 1 Revision 1 0 Forward 1 1 Stop VFD2N200G K1 K2 DI1: Forward run (PWD) DI2: Reverse running (REV) COM: Digital common port

Figure 6-7 Two-line mode 2

Parameter description

Specification of high-performance vector convertor

2: Three-wire control mode 1: This mode is enabled terminal DI3, respectively, by direction DI1, DI2 control.

TerminalsSet pointDescription
DI11 Forward running (FWD)
DI22Reverse running (REV)
DI33Three-wire run control

When there is the need to run, the terminal must first DI 3 closed by the rising edges of the DI1 or DI2 to achieve forward or reverse motor control.

When you need to stop, by disconnecting DI3 terminal shall signal to achieve. Wherein, DI1, DI2, DI3 are multifunctional input terminals of DI1 \~ DI10, DI1, DI2 pulse are effective, DI3 is effective level.

MSW FI-7500 - P4 group: Input termianl - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SB2"] --> B["DI1 Forward running (FWD)"]
    C["SB1"] --> D["DI3 Three line operation control"]
    E["SB3"] --> F["DI2 Reverse run (REV)"]
    G["COM"] --> H["Digital public end"]

Figure6-8 Three wire control mode 1

Among :

SB1: stop button SB2: Forward button SB3: reverse button

3: Three-line control mode 2: This mode enable terminal to DI 3, run the command given by the DI1, DI2 direction by the state to decide.

Terminal function is set as follows :

TerminalsSet pointDescription
DI11 Forward running
DI22Reverse running (REV)
DI33Three-wire run control

In the need to run, must first close the DI3 terminal, from the DI1 of the pulse rise along the motor running signal, DI2 state of the motor direction signal.

In the need to stop, it is required to disconnect the DI3 terminal signal to achieve. Among them, DI1, DI2, DI3 for the DI1 \~ DI10 multi function input terminals, DI1 for the pulse effective, DI3, DI2 is effective.

KRunning direction
0Forward
1REV

MSW FI-7500 - P4 group: Input termianl - 4

flowchart
graph TD
    A["SB2"] --> B["DI1"]
    C["SB1"] --> D["DI3"]
    E["K"] --> F["DI2"]
    B --> G["Forward running (FWD)"]
    D --> H["Three line operation control"]
    F --> I["Reverse run(REV)"]
    G --> J["VFD"]
    H --> J
    I --> J
    J --> K["COM digital public end"]

Figure6-9 Three wire control mode 2

Among them: SB1: stop button SB2: run the button

P4-12Terminal UP / DOWN rate ofFactory default 1.00Hz/s
Setting0.01Hz/s~65.535Hz/s

When setting terminal UP / DOWN adjust set frequency, the frequency rate of change, that is, the amount of change in frequency per second.

When P0-22 (frequency decimal point) is 2, the value is in the range of 0.001Hz / s \~ 65.535Hz / s.

When P0-22 (frequency decimal point) is 1, the value is in the range of 0.01Hz / s \~ 655.35Hz / s.

P4-13AI curve 1 Minimum InputFactory default0.00V
Setting0.00V~P4-15
P4-14AI curve 1 minimum input corresponding settingsFactory default0.0%
Setting-100.00%~100.0%
P4-15AI curve 1 maximum inputFactory default10.00V
SettingP4-13~10.00V
P4-16AI curve 1 maximum input corresponding to setFactory default100.0%
Setting-100.00%~100.0%
P4-17AI1 filtering timeFactory default0.10s
Setting0.00s~10.00s

The above function codes are used to set the analog input voltage setpoint relationship between its representatives.

When the analog input voltage is greater than the set “maximum input” (P4-15), the analog voltage in accordance with the “maximum input” computing; similarly, when the analog input voltage is less than the set “minimum input” (P4-13), according to “AI is below the minimum input setting Select” (P4-34) is set to the minimum input or 0.0% calculated.

When the analog input is current input, 1mA current corresponds to 0.5V.

AI1 input filtering time for setting AI1 software filtering time when the analog easily disturbed site, please increase the filter time so that the analog detection stabilized, but the greater the filtering time of the analog detection slow response times, how to set up a trade-off depending on the application.

In different applications, analog setting 100.0% of the nominal value of the corresponding meanings vary, please refer to the description of each part of the application.

The following illustrates a case where two typical settings :

MSW FI-7500 - P4 group: Input termianl - 5

line | Frequency (V) | Rotational Speed (%) | |---|---| | 0V(0mA) | 0 | | 10V(20mA) | 100.0 | | -100.0% | -100.0% |

Figure6-10 The corresponding relationship between the simulation and the set amount

P4-18AI curve 2 minimum inputFactory default0.00V
Setting range0.00V~P4-20
P4-19AI curve 2 minimum input corresponding settingsFactory default0.0%
Setting range-100.00%~100.0%
P4-20AI curve 2 maximum inputFactory default10.00V
Setting rangeP4-18~10.00V
P4-21AI curve 2 maximum input corresponding to setFactory default100.0%
Setting range-100.00%~100.0%
P4-22AI2 filtering timeFactory default0.10s
Setting range0.00s~10.00s

Function and use of curve 2, please refer to the description of the curve 1.

P4-23AI curve 3 minimum inputFactory default0.00V
Setting range0.00s~P4-25
P4-24AI curve 3 minimum input corresponding settingsFactory default0.0%
Setting range-100.00%~100.0%
P4-25AI curve 3 maximum inputFactory default10.00V
Setting rangeP4-23~10.00V
P4-26AI curve 3 maximum input corresponding to setFactory default100.0%
Setting range-100.00%~100.0%
P4-27AI3 filtering timeFactory default0.10s
Setting range0.00s~10.00s

Function and use of curve 3, please refer to the description of the curve 1.

P4-28PULSE minimum inputFactory default0.00kHz
Setting range0.00kHz~P4-30
P4-29PULSE minimum input correspondenceFactory default0.0%
Setting range-100.00%~100.0%
P4-30PULSE maximum inputFactory default50.00kHz
Setting rangeP4-28~50.00kHz
P4-31PULSE maximum input correspondenceFactory default100.0%
Setting range-100.00%~100.0%
P4-32PULSE filtering timeFactory default0.10s
Setting range0.00s~10.00s

This function code is used to set the relationship DI5 pulse frequency corresponding to the set between.

Pulse frequency inverter can only be entered through DI5 channel. Application and function curve of this group is similar to 1, please refer to Note 1 of the curve.

P4-33AI curve selectionFactory default321
Setting rangeSingle digitAI1 curve selection
1Curve 1 (2 points, see P4-13 ~ P4-16)
2Curve 2 (2 points, see P4-18 ~ P4-21)
3Curve 3 (2 points, see P4-23 ~ P4-26)
4Curve 4 (4 points, see A6-00 ~ A6-07)
5Curve 5 (4 points, see A6-08 ~ A6-15)
Ten bitAI2 curve selection (1 ~ 6, the same as above)
Hundred bitAI3 curve selection (1 ~ 6, the same as above)

The function code bits, ten, one hundred are used to select, analog input AI1, AI2, AI3 corresponding setting curve. 3 analog inputs can be selected in any of the five kinds of curve a.

Curve 1, curve 2, curve 3 are 2 point curve, set in P4 group function code, whereas curve 4 and curve 5 are 4 point curve, you need to set the A8 group function codes.

This inverter standard unit provides two analog inputs, AI3 must be configured to use multi-function input and output expansion card.

P4-34AI is below the minimum input settingFactory default000
Setting rangeSingle digitAI1 lower than the minimum input settings select
0Corresponding minimum input setting
1 0.0%
Ten bitAI2 lower than the minimum input settings selected (0 ~ 1, above)
Hundred bitAI3 lower than the minimum input settings selected (0 ~ 1, above)

The function code is used to set, when the analog input voltage is less than the set “minimum input”, the corresponding analog set how to determine.

The function code unit, ten bit, hundred bit, corresponding to the analog input AI1, AI2, AI3. If this option is 0. When the AI input below the “minimum input”, corresponding to the analog setting function code to determine the curve “minimum input corresponds to a given” (P4-14, P4-19, P4-24).

If this option is 1, then when AE input below the minimum input, the analog corresponding to 0.0%.

P4-35DI1 delay timeFactory default0.0s
Setting0.0s~3600.0s
P4-36DI2 delay timeFactory default0.0s
Setting0.0s~3600.0s
P4-37DI3 delay timeFactory default0.0s
Setting0.0s~3600.0s

When DI terminal for setting status changes, they are changes in the delay time of the inverter. Currently only DI1, DI2, DI3 have set the time delay function.

P4-38DI terminal effective mode selection 1Factory default00000
Setting rangeSingle digitDI1 terminal active set
0Active High
1Active Low
Ten bitDI2 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)
Hundred bitDI3 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)
Thousand bitDI4 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)
Ten thousand bitDI5 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)
P4-39DI terminal effective mode selection 2Factory default00000
Setting rangeSingle digitDI6 terminal active set
0Active High
1Active Low
Ten bitDI7 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)
Hundred bitDI8 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)
Thousand bitDI9 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)
Ten thousand bitDI10 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)

It is used for setting the digital input terminal of the active mode. When choosing high effective, the corresponding S terminal and COM communicated effectively, disconnect invalid. Selected as active low, the corresponding S terminal and COM connectivity invalid, effectively disconnected.

P5 Group--Output terminals

This series inverter comes standard with a multifunction analog output terminal, a multi-function digital output terminal, a multi-function relay output terminal, an FM terminal (selected as high-speed pulse output terminal, can also choose a set open switch electrode output). As the output terminal can not meet the site with app, you need the optional multi-function input and output expansion card.

Multi-function input and output expansion card output terminals, comprising a multi-function analog output terminal (AO2), 1 multifunction relay output terminal (relay 2), a multi-function digital output terminal (DO2).

P5-00FM terminal output mode selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Pulse output (FMP)
1Switching output (FMR)

FM terminal is a programmable multiplexing terminal can be used as high-speed pulse output terminal (FMP), the switch can also be used as open collector output terminal (FMR).

As the pulse output FMP, the maximum output pulse frequency is 100kHz, FMP-related functions can be found P5-06 instructions.

P5-01FMRI function selection (open collector output terminal)Factory default0
P5-02Relay output function selection (T / A-T / B-T / C)Factory default2
P5-03Expansion card relay output function selection (P / A-P / B-P / C)Factory default0
P5-04DO1 output function selection (open collector output terminal)Factory default1
P5-05Expansion card DO2 output function selectionFactory default4

The five function code is used to select the five digital outputs function, where T / A-T / B-T / C and P / A-P / B-P / C, respectively on control board and expansion card relay.

Multi-function output terminal functions are as follows:

Set pointFunction Explanation
0No output Output terminal hasno function
1Inverter runningIndicates the drive is in running state, the output frequency (can be zero), ON signal is output.
2Fault output (downtime)When the drive fails and downtime, it outputs ON signal.
3Frequency level detection output FDT1Please refer to the function code P8-19, P8-20 description.
4Frequency arrivalPlease refer to the function code P8-21 description.
5Zero speed operation (no output shutdown)Inverter running and the output frequency is 0, output ON signal. When the drive is shut down, the signal is OFF.
6Motor overload pre-alarmBefore the motor overload protection, according to the overload pre-alarm threshold value judgment over pre-alarm threshold value output ON signal. Motor overload parameter settings see Function Code P9-00 ~ P9-02.
7Inverter overload pre-alarmBefore the inverter overload occurs 10s, output ON signal.
8Set counting value arrivalWhen the count value reaches the value of PB-08 set, output ON signal.
9Designated counting value arrivalWhen the count value reaches the value of PB-09 group, output ON signal. PB reference counting function group Function
10Length arrivalWhen detecting the actual length exceeds PB-05 set length, output ON signal.
11PLC Complete cycle After simple PLC completes one cycle, the output of a pulse width of 250ms.
12Total running time arrivalWhen the accumulated running time exceeds the time set by P8-17, output ON signal.
13Frequency is defined inWhen the set frequency exceeds the upper limit frequency or lower frequency, and output frequency has reached the upper limit frequency or lower frequency, the output ON signal.
14Torque limitingDrive under the speed control mode, when the output torque reaches the torque limit, the inverter is in the stall protection status, and ON signal is output.
15Ready to runWhen the inverter main circuit and control circuit power supply has stabilized, and the drive does not detect any fault information, the drive is in an operational state, output ON signal.
16AI1>AI2When the value is greater than the analog input AI1 value AI2 input and output ON signal.
17Upper limit frequency arrivalWhen the operation frequency reaches the upper limit frequency, output ON signal.
18The lower limit frequency arrival (not output shutdown)When the operation frequency reaches the lower limit frequency, output ON signal. Under the standstill signal is OFF.
19Brown-state outputWhen the inverter is under voltage state, output ON signal.
20Communication PreferencesRefer to the communication protocol.
21RetentionRetention
22RetentionRetention
23Zero-speed operation 2 (shutdown also output)Inverter output frequency is 0, the output ON signal. The signal is also at a standstill is ON.
24Cumulative power-up time arrivalWhen the inverter's accumulated power-on time (P7-13) P8-16 exceeds the set time, the output signal is ON.
25Frequency level detection output FDT2Please refer to the function code P8-28, P8-29 description.
26Frequency 1 reaches the outputPlease refer to the function code P8-30, P8-31 description.
27Frequency 2 reaches the outputPlease refer to the function code P8-32, P8-33 description.
28Current 1 reaches the outputPlease refer to the function code P8-38, P8-39 description.
29Current 2 reaches the outputPlease refer to the function code P8-40, P8-41 description.
30The timing to the outputWhen the timer function Select (P8-42) is valid, the inverter running time after this set timing, output ON signal.
31AI1 input overrunWhen the value is greater than the analog input AI1 P8-46 (AI1 input protection limit) or less than P8-45 (AI1 input protection limit), it outputs ON signal.
32Carrying outWhen the drive is off-load state, output ON signal.
33Reverse operationReverse drive is running, output signal ON
34Zero current statePlease refer to the function code P8-28, P8-29 description.
35Module temperature reachedHeat sink temperature of the inverter module (P7-07) to reach the set temperature reaches the value of the module (P8-47), the output signal ON
36Software current limitPlease refer to the function code P8-36, P8-37 description.
37The lower limit frequency arrival (also stop output)When the operation frequency reaches the lower limit frequency, output ON signal. In the stop state of the signal is also ON.
38Alarm outputWhen the inverter failure, and the failure to continue processing mode, the inverter alarm output.
39Motor overtemperature alarmWhen the motor temperature reaches P9-58 (motor overheating prediction threshold), the output signal is ON. (motor temperature can be viewed through U0-34)
40The running time arrivalThe inverter starts running longer than the time set by P8-53, output ON signal.
P5-06FMP output function selection (pulse output terminals)Factory default0
P5-07AO1 output function selectionFactory default0
P5-08AO2 output function selectionFactory default1

FMP terminal pulse frequency output range is 0.01kHz \~ P5-09 (FMP maximum output frequency), P5-09 can be set between 0.01kHz \~ 100.00kHz.

Analog outputs AO1 and AO2 output range is 0V \~ 10V, or 0mA \~ 20mA. Pulse output or analog output range, with the corresponding scaling function relationship in the following table:

Set pointFunctionPulse or analog output corresponding to 0.0% to 100.0% of the function
0Operating frequency0 ~ maximum output frequency
1Set frequency0 ~ maximum output frequency
2Output current0~2 times Motor rated current
3Output torque0 to 2 times rated motor torque
4Output Power0-2 times of rated power
5Output voltage0 to 1.2 times the rated voltage of the inverter
6Pulse input0.01kHz~100.00kHz
7AI10V~10V
8AI20V~10V (or 0 ~ 20mA)
9AI30V~10V
10Length0 to the maximum set length
11The count value0 to the maximum count
12Communication Preferences0.0%~100.0%
13Motor speed0 ~ maximum output frequency corresponding to the rotational speed
14Output current0.0A~1000.0A
15Output voltage0.0V~1000.0V
P5-09FMP maximum output frequencyFactory default50.00kHz
Setting range0.01kHz~100.00kHz

When FM is selected as a pulse output terminal, the function code is used to select the maximum output pulse frequency value.

P5-10AO1 zero offset coefficientFactory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~+100.0%
P5-11AO1 gainFactory default1.00
Setting range-10.00~+10.00
P5-12Expansion card AO2 zero offset coefficientFactory default0.00%
Setting range-100.0%~+100.0%
P5-13Expansion card AO2 gainFactory default1.00
Setting range-10.00~+10.00

Parameter description

Specification of high-performance vector convertor

The above function codes are generally used to bias the output amplitude and zero drift correction analog output. It can also be used to customize the desired output curve AO.

If zero offset by “b” represents the gain by k, the actual output by Y, X represents standard output, the actual output is: Y=kX+b . Wherein, AO1, AO2 zero-bias factor of 100% corresponds to 10V (or 20mA), it refers to the standard output in the absence of bias and gain correction, output 0V \~ 10V (or 0mA \~ 20mA) corresponding to the amount of the analog output.

For example: If the analog output is the operating frequency, at a frequency of 0 output 8V, frequency is the maximum frequency output 3V, the gain should be set to “-0.50” bias should be set to “80%.”

P5-17FMR output delay timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~3600.0s
P5-18RELAY1output delay timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~3600.0s
P5-19RELAY2output delay timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~3600.0s
P5-20DO1 output delay timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~3600.0s
P5-21DO2 output delay timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~3600.0s

Set the output terminals FMR, relay 1, relay 2, DO1 and DO2, from state to produce the actual output delay time change occurs.

P5-22DO terminal output valid stateFactory default0
Setting rangeSingle digitFMR active choice
0Positive logic
1Inv
Ten bitRELAY1 Active set (0-1, supra)
Hundred bitRELAY2 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)
Thousand bitDO1 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)
Ten thousand bitDO2 Terminal active set (0-1, supra)

Define the output terminal of FMR, relay 1, relay 2, DO1 and DO2 output logic.

0: Positive logic, digital output terminal and the corresponding common terminal communicates to the active state, disconnect inactive state;

1: Anti-logic, digital output terminal and the corresponding common terminal communicates to the inactive state, disconnect the active state.

P6 Group--Start stop control

P6-00Start mode Factory default0
Setting range0Direct start
1Speed tracking restart
2Start pre-excitation (AC induction motor)

0: Direct start

When the DC brake time is set to 0, the inverter starts running from the starting frequency. When the DC brake time is not 0, the DC brake first, and then run from the starting frequency. Suitable for small inertia load when you start the motor may have rotated occasion.

1: Speed tracking restart of the drive motor speed and direction of the judge, and then to track the frequency of the motor start,

Rotating motor smoothly without impact start. Instantaneous power suitable for large inertia load restart. To ensure the performance speed tracking start, you need to accurately set the motor F1 group parameters.

2: Induction pre-excitation start only for asynchronous motors, used before the motor running to first establish a magnetic field. Pre-excitation current, pre-excitation time refer to the function code P6-05, P6-06 instructions.

If the pre-excitation time is set to 0, the drive to cancel pre-excitation process starts from the starting frequency. Pre-excitation time is not 0, the first and then start pre-excitation can improve the dynamic response performance of the motor.

P6-01Speed tracking modeFactory default0
Setting range0Start from stop frequency
1Starting from zero speed
2Start from maximum frequency

As to complete the process with the shortest time to speed tracking, select the drive motor speed tracking mode:

0: Tracking down from the frequency of the power failure, usually used in this way.
1: Start tracking upwards from zero frequency, for use in case of power failure a long time to start again.
2: Tracking down from the maximum frequency, the general power of the load.

P6-02Speed tracking speedFactory default2
Setting range1~100

When speed tracking restart, select speed tracking speed. Parameter is larger, faster track. But it sets too high may cause tracking results unreliable.

P6-03Start frequencyFactory default0
Setting range0.00Hz~10.00Hz
P6-04Start frequency retention timeFactory default0
Setting range0.0s~100.0s

As to ensure that the motor torque at start-up, set an appropriate start frequency. In order to establish the full flux motor when starting, we need to start frequency to maintain a certain time.

Start from the lower frequency limit frequency P6-03. But set the target frequency is less than starting frequency, the inverter does not start, it is on standby.

Reversible switching process, starting frequency holding time does not work. Start frequency holding time is not included in the acceleration time, but is included in the running time of simple PLC.

Example 1:

P0-03=0 Frequency source is digital given

P0-08=2.00Hz Digital set frequency is 2.00Hz

P6-03=5.00Hz Starting frequency is 5.00Hz

P6-04=2.0s Start frequency holding time is 2.0s At this time, the inverter is in the standby state, the inverter output frequency is 0.00Hz.

Example 2:

P0-03=0 Frequency source is digital given

P0-08=10.00Hz Digital set frequency is 10.00Hz

P6-03=5.00Hz Starting frequency is 5.00Hz

P6-04=2.0s Start frequency retention time 2.0s

At this time, the drive accelerates to 5.00Hz, continued to 2.0s, and then accelerated to a given frequency 10.00Hz.

P6-05DC brake current / and excitation currentFactory default0%
Setting range0%~100%
P6-06Starting DC braking time / pre-excitation timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~100.0s

DC brake is generally used to stop and start the motor running. Pre-excitation is used to make the magnetic field induction motor and then start to establish and improve the response speed.

DC brake is valid only in the start mode is direct start. This time the frequency setting press Start DC braking current DC braking, DC braking time after the start and then start running. If the DC braking time is set to 0, no start directly after DC braking. DC braking current increases, the greater the braking force.

If the startup mode for the asynchronous motor pre-excitation start, the drive set in the pre-press pre-established magnetic field current, after the set pre-magnetizing time before starting to run. If the set pre-magnetising time is 0, no pre-excitation processes started directly.

DC brake current / pre-excitation current, the percentage relative to the rated drive current.

P6-07Acceleration and deceleration mode Factory default0
Setting range0Linear acceleration and deceleration
1S curve acceleration and deceleration A
2S curve acceleration and deceleration B

Select the drive frequency change in the start and stop the process of moving way.

0: Linear acceleration and deceleration The output frequency linear increment or decrement. This provides four kinds of acceleration and deceleration time. Can be selected via multifunction digital input terminals (P4-00 \~ P4-08).

1: S curve acceleration and deceleration A

Output frequency increases or decreases according to S curve. S curve requires gentle place to start or stop the use, such as elevators, conveyor belt. P6-08 and P6-09 respectively function code defines the time ratio of S curve acceleration and deceleration of the initial segment and the end segment

2: S curve acceleration and deceleration B

In the S-curve acceleration and deceleration B, the motor rated frequency/ is always the inflection point of the S-curve. Shown in Figure 6-12. Generally used for high speed area above the rated frequency requires rapid acceleration and deceleration of the occasion.

When setting frequencies above the rated frequency, acceleration and deceleration time:

$$ t = \left(\frac {4}{9} \times \left(\frac {f}{1 _ {b}}\right) ^ {2} + \frac {5}{9} \times T \right. $$

Wherein, f is set frequency, f_b is motor rated frequency, T is the time the motor nominal frequency f_b

P6-08S curve start section time ratioFactory default30.0%
Setting range0.0%~(100.0%-P6-09)
P6-08S curve start section time ratioFactory default30.0%
Setting range0.0%~(100.0%-P6-08)

P6-08 and P6-09 function codes are defined, S curve acceleration and deceleration A of the initial segment and the end time is the ratio of two function codes to meet: P6-08 + P6-09≤100.0%.

Figure 6-11 t1 is the parameter P6-08 defined parameters, output during this time frequency slope increases. t2 is the parameter P6-09 defined time, during this time the output frequency slope changes gradually to zero. During the time between t1 and t2, the output frequency slope is fixed, that this interval be linear acceleration and deceleration.

MSW FI-7500 - 0: Direct start - 1

line | Time t | Output frequency Hz | | ------ | ------------------- | | t1 | 0 | | t2 | 1 | | t1 | 1 | | t2 | 0 |

Figure 6-11 S-curve A schematic

MSW FI-7500 - 0: Direct start - 2

line | Time t | Output frequency Hz | | ------ | ------------------- | | T | 0 | | Peak | 10 | | Peak | 10 | | Peak | 0 |

Figure 6-12 S-curve B schematic

P6-10Stop mode Factory default0
Setting range0Deceleration to stop
1Free stoppage

0: Deceleration stop When the stop command is valid, the inverter reduces the output frequency according to the deceleration time when the frequency drops to zero downtime.
1: Coast to stop After stop command is valid, the inverter output immediately, and the motor coasts to stop by its mechanical inertia.

Parameter description
Specification of high-performance vector convertor

P6-11DC injection braking initial frequencyFactory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
P6-12Halt DC braking waiting timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~36.0s
P6-13Halt DC braking currentFactory default0%
Setting range0%~100%
P6-14Halt DC braking timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~36.0s

DC injection braking Starting frequency: deceleration stop process, when the operating frequency to reduce the frequency to start DC braking process.

DC braking waiting time: the operating frequency is reduced to DC braking starting frequency, the inverter will stop output for some time before starting DC braking process. At high speed to prevent the start of DC braking can cause over-current fault.

DC braking current: DC braking means the output current, the relative percentage of the motor rated current. The higher this value, the DC brake effect, but the greater the heat the motor and the inverter.

DC braking time: DC braking holding time. This value is 0 DC braking process is canceled. DC injection braking process schematic diagram shown in Figure 6-13.

MSW FI-7500 - 0: Direct start - 3

line | Time t | Output frequency Hz | Output voltage effective value | Halt DC braking amount | Run command | | ------ | ------------------- | ------------------------------ | ----------------------- | ----------- | | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 2 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 3 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 4 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 5 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 6 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 7 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 8 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 9 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 10 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 11 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 12 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 13 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 14 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 15 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 16 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 17 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 18 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 19 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 20 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 21 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 22 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 23 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 24 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 25 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 26 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 27 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 28 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 29 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 30 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 31 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 32 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 33 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 34 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 35 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 36 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 37 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 38 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | 39 | 1 | 1 | 0 | 0 | | Note: The output frequency and voltage effective value are estimated based on the simulation output. The halt of the brake amount is calculated by subtracting the halt of the braking time from the initial frequency. The halt of the braking time is calculated by subtracting the halt of the braking time from the initial frequency. The halt of the braking time is calculated by subtracting the halt of the braking time from the initial frequency. The run command is calculated by subtracting the halt of the braking time from the initial frequency. The halt of the braking time is calculated by subtracting the halt of the braking time from the initial frequency.

Figure 6-13 DC injection braking schematic

P6-15Brake usageFactory default100%
Setting range0%~100%

Only the built-in braking unit is valid.

Duty cycle, brake usage rate is used to adjust the movable unit, the high duty cycle operation of the braking unit, the braking effect is strong, but the inverter braking bus voltage fluctuations.

P7 Group--Keyboard and Display

P7-01JOG key function selectionFactory default0
Setting range0JOG key is invalid
1Operation panel command channel and remote command channel (terminal command channel or commandchannel)
2Reversing switch
3Forward jog
4Reverse jog

JOG key for the multi-function keys, you can set the JOG key functions via the function code. In the shutdown and can be run through the key switch.

0: This key has no function.

1: Keyboard commands and remote operation switch. Means an order to switch the source, namely the current command source and keyboard control (local operation) switch. If the current command source is keypad control, this key function is disabled.
2: Reversible switching direction switching by frequency command JOG key. This feature is only command source operation panel command channel is active.
3: Forward jog forward rotation Jog (FJOG) JOG key keyboard.
4: Reverse jog achieve reverse jog (RJOG) JOG key keyboard.

P7-02STOP / RESET key functionFactory default1
Setting range0Only in keyboard mode, STOP / RES key stop function effectively
1In any operating mode, STOP / RES key stop function is valid
P7-03LED display running parameters 1Factory default 1F
Setting range0 0 0 0 FFFFMSW FI-7500 - P7 Group--Keyboard and Display - 1 MSW FI-7500 - P7 Group--Keyboard and Display - 2 If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set P7-0 3 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
P7-04LED display running parameters 2Factory default0
Setting range0 0 0 0 FFFFMSW FI-7500 - P7 Group--Keyboard and Display - 3 MSW FI-7500 - P7 Group--Keyboard and Display - 4 If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set P7-0 4 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.

These two parameters are used to set the parameters that can be viewed when the AC drive is in the running state. You can view a maximum of 32 running state parameters that are displayed from the lowest bit of P7-03.

P7-05LED display stop parametersFactory default0
Setting range0000~FFFF0000-FFFFMSW FI-7500 - P7 Group--Keyboard and Display - 5If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set F7-05 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
P7-06Load speed display coefficientFactory default1.0000
Setting range0.0001~6.5000

When you need to display the load speed, this parameter, adjusting the correspondence between the output frequency and load speed. Correspondence between specific reference P7-12 description.

P7-07Heat sink temperature of the inverter moduleFactory default0
Setting range 0.0^ 100.0^

Display inverter module IGBT temperature.

Different models of inverter module IGBT overtemperature protection value is different.

P7-08Rectifier heatsink temperatureFactory default0
Setting range 0.0^ 100.0^

Temperature display rectifier.

Different models of the rectifier overtemperature protection value is different.

P7-09Total running timeFactory default0h
Setting range0h~65535h

Displays the accumulated run time of the inverter. When running time reaches the set running time P8-17, the inverter multifunction digital output (12) outputs ON signal.

Parameter description
Specification of high-performance vector convertor

P7-10Product No.Factory default
Setting rangeInverter product number
P7-11Software version numberFactory default
Setting rangeControl panel software version number.
P7-12Load speed display decimal digitsFactory default0
Setting range00 decimal places
11 decimal places
22 decimal places
33 decimal places

Load speed setting for the decimal display. The following example illustrates the calculation of load speed:

If the load speed display coefficient 2.000 P7-06, P7-12 load speed to 2 decimal places (two decimal places), when the inverter operating frequency 40.00Hz, the load speed: 40.00 × 2.000 = 80.00 (2 decimal places display)

If the drive is shut down, the load speed display setting frequency corresponding to the speed, that is, “to set the load speed.” To set the frequency 50.00Hz, for example, the stop state load speed: 50.00 × 2.000 = 100.00 (two decimal display)

P7-13Cumulative power-up timeFactory default0h
Setting range0h~65535h

Cumulative power-time display from the factory started the drive.

This time reaches the set power-up time (P8-17), the inverter multi-function digital output (24) outputs ON signal.

P7-14The total power consumptionFactory default-
Setting range0 to 65535 KWh

So far show the total power consumption of the drive.

P8 Group--Auxiliary function

P8-00Jog frequencyFactory default2.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
P8-01Jog acceleration timeFactory default20.0s
Setting range0.00s~6500.0s
P8-02Jog Deceleration timeFactory default20.0s
Setting range0.00s~6500.0s

When you define the drive jog a given frequency and the deceleration time.

Jog running, start fixed direct start-up mode (P6-00 = 0), stop mode is fixed to decelerate stop (P6-10 = 0).

P8-03Acceleration time 2Factory default20.0s
Setting range0.0s~6500.0s
P8-04Deceleration time 2Factory default20.0s
Setting range0.0s~6500.0s
P8-05Acceleration time 3Factory default20.0s
Setting range0.0s~6500.0s
P8-06Deceleration time 3Factory default20.0s
Setting range0.0s~6500.0s
P8-07Acceleration time 4Factory default20.0s
Setting range0.0s~6500.0s
P8-08Deceleration time 4Factory default20.0s
Setting range0.0s~6500.0s

This VFD provides 4 group of acceleration and deceleration time, respectively P0-17 / P0-18 and said 3 group of acceleration and deceleration time.

4 group define exactly deceleration time, refer to the P0-17 and P0-18 instructions. Through different combinations of multifunction digital input terminal DI, you can switch between 4 group of acceleration and deceleration time, please refer to the specific use function code P4-01 \~ P4-05 of instructions.

P8-09Skip frequency 1Factory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
P8-10Skip frequency 2Factory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
P8-11Jump frequency rangeFactory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency

When the jump frequency range within the set frequency, the actual running frequency will run at a frequency from the set frequency jump closer. By setting the frequency hopping allows the drive to avoid the mechanical resonance point of load. VFD can set two skip frequencies, when the two skip frequencies are set to 0, the jump frequency function is canceled. Principle jump frequency and the amplitude of frequency hopping schematic, refer to Figure 6-14.

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 1

line | Time t | Output frequency Hz | | ------ | ------------------- | | 0 | 0 | | 1 | 1 | | 2 | 2 |

Figure 6-14 Skip frequency schematic

P8-12Reversible dead timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.00s~3000.0s

Set the inverter reversing the transition process, the output of 0Hz at the time of transition, shown in Figure 6-15:

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 2

line | Time Segment | Output Frequency (Hz) | | ------------ | --------------------- | | Forward | High | | Deadtime | Low | | Reversion | Low |

Figure 6-15 Reversible schematic dead time

P8-13Inversion of Control EnableFactory default0
Setting range0Allow
1Ban

Set up the drive via the parameter is allowed to run in the inverted state, in the case of motor reversal is not allowed to set P8-13 = 1.

P8-14Set frequency is lower than the lower limit frequency operation modeFactory default0
Setting range0Operation in lower limit frequency
1Shutdown
2Running at zero speed

When the set frequency is lower than minimum frequency, the operating status of the inverter can be selected using this parameter. VFD offers three operating modes to meet various application requirements.

P8-15Droop controlFactory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz~10.00Hz

This feature is typically used for load distribution of multiple motor drive with a load.

Droop control means that as the load increases, so that the inverter output frequency decreases, so more than one motor drive the same load, the load of the motor output frequency drops more, thereby reducing the load of the motor to achieve multiple motors load evenly.

This parameter refers to the inverter rated output load, the output value of the frequency drops.

P8-16Set the accumulated power-on timeFactory default0h
Setting range0h~65000h

When the accumulated power-on time (P7-13) P8-16 reach the set power-up time, the inverter multi-function digital output DO ON signal. The following examples illustrate the application:

Example: Combining virtual DIDO function, to achieve the set power-up time after reaching 100 hours, the inverter fault alarm output. Program:

Virtual DI1 terminal function set to user-defined fault 1: A1-00 = 44;

D11 virtual terminal active, is set to come from virtual DO1: A105 = 0000; virtual DO1 function, set the power-on time of arrival: A1-11 = 24; set the power accumulated 100 hours of arrival: P8-16 = 100.

When the cumulative power-up time of 100 hours, and the inverter fault output Err24.

P8-17Set the accumulated run timeFactory default0h
Setting range0h~65000h

It is used to set the running time of the inverter.

When the total running time (P7-09) reaches this setup running time, the inverter multi-function digital output DO ON signal.

P8-18Start protection selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Does not protect
1Protection

This parameter is related to the security function of the inverter.

If this parameter is set to 1 if the time run on electric drive command is active (for example, a terminal run command before power is in a closed state), the inverter does not respond to the Run command, you must first run the command once removed, run the command again after the effective drive only response.

In addition, if the parameter is set to 1, if the inverter fault reset time run command, the inverter will not run in response to a command, you must first run the command to remove the running protection status.

Setting this parameter to 1 can be prevented in the knowledge, that occur at power or fault reset, the motor operates in response to commands and cause danger.

P8-19Frequency detection value (FDT1)Factory default50.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
P8-20Frequency detection hysteresis value (FDT1)Factory default5.0%
Setting range0.0% ~ 100.0% (FDT1 level)

When the operating frequency higher than the frequency detection value, the inverter output DO multifunction output ON signal, and the frequency is lower than the detection value after a certain frequency, output ON DO signal is canceled.

Said parameter value is set for detecting the output frequency, output value and hysteresis action removed. Wherein P8-20 lag frequency percentage frequency detection value P8-19 respect. Figure 6-16 is a schematic diagram FDT functionality.

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 3
Figure 6-16 FDT level schematic

P8-21Frequency arrival detection widthFactory default0.0%
Setting range0.0% to 100% (maximum frequency)

Operating frequency of the inverter, and is in the target frequency range, the inverter output multifunction DO ON signal.

This parameter is used to set the frequency arrival detection range, the parameter is a percentage of the maximum frequency. Figure 6-17 is a schematic diagram of a frequency to reach.

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 4

line | Time | Output Frequency (Hz) | Set Frequency (Hz) | Detection Amplitude (Hz) | |------|------------------------|--------------------|--------------------------| | 0 | Low | Low | - | | 1 | Medium | Medium | - | | 2 | High | High | - | | 3 | High | High | - | | 4 | High | High | - | | 5 | Medium | Medium | - | | 6 | Low | Low | - | | 7 | Low | Low | - | | 8 | Low | Low | - | | 9 | Low | Low | - | | 10 | Low | Low | - | | 11 | Low | Low | - | | 12 | Low | Low | - | | 13 | Low | Low | - | | 14 | Low | Low | - | | 15 | Low | Low | - | | 16 | Low | Low | - | | 17 | Low | Low | - | | 18 | Low | Low | - | | 19 | Low | Low | - | | 20 | Low | Low | - | | 21 | Low | Low | - | | 22 | Low | Low | - | | 23 | Low | Low | - | | 24 | Low | Low | - | | 25 | Low | Low | - | | 26 | Low | Low | - | | 27 | Low | Low | - | | 28 | Low | Low | - | | 29 | Low | Low | - | | 30 | Low | Low | - | | 31 | Low | Low | - | | 32 | Low | Low | - | | 33 | Low | Low | - | | 34 | Low | Low | - | | 35 | Low | Low | - | | 36 | Low | Low | - | | 37 | Low | Low | - | | 38 | Low | Low | - | | 39 | Low | Low | - | | 40 | Low | Low | - | | 41 | Low | Low | - | | 42 | Low | Low | - | | 43 | Low | Low | - | | 44 | Low | Low | - | | 45 | Low | Low | - | | 46 | Low | Low | - | | 47 | Low | Low | - | | 48 | Low | Low | - | | 49 | Low | Low | - | | 50 | Low | Low | - | | 51 | Low | Low | - | | 52 | Low | Low | - | | 53 | Low | Low | - | | 54 | Low | Low | - | | 55 | Low | Low | - | | 56 | Low | Low | - | | 57 | Low | Low | - | | 58 | Low | Low | - | | 59 | Low | Low | - | | 60 | Low | Low | - | | 61 | Low | Low | - | | 62 | Low | Low | - | | 63 | Low | Low | - | | 64 | Low | Low | - | | 65 | Low | Low | - | | 66 | Low | Low | - | | 67 | Low | Low | - | | 68 | Low | Low | - | | 69 | Low | Low | - | | 70 | Low | Low | - | | 71 | Low | Low | - | | 72 | Low | Low | - | | 73 | Low | Low | - | | 74 | Low | Low | - | | 75 | Low | Low | - | | 76 | Low | Low | - | | 77 | Low | Low | - | | 78 | Low | Low | - | | 79 | Low | Low | - | | 80 | Low | Low | - | | 81 | Low | Low | - | | 82 | Low | Low | - | | 83 | Low | Low | - | | 84 | Low | Low | - | | 85 | Low | Low | - | | 86 | Low | Low | - | | 87 | Low | Low | - | | 88 | Low | Low | - | | 89 | Low | Low | - | | 90 | Low | Low | - | | 91 | Low | Low | - | | 92 | Low | Low | - | | 93 | Low | Low | - | | 94 | Low | Low | - | | 95 | Low | Low | - | | 96 | Low | Low | - | | 97 | Low | Low | - | | 98 | Low | Low | - | | 99 | Low | Low | - | | 100 | High | High | High | | \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{ON} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \text{OR} \end{array}

Figure 6-17 Frequency arriving detection amplitude schematic

P8-22Acceleration and deceleration process Jump frequency whether it is validFactory default0
Setting range0: Invalid1: Valid

The function code is used to set, during acceleration or deceleration, the jumping frequency is valid. Is set to be valid when running at a frequency hopping frequency range, the actual operating frequency will jump frequency setting to skip the border. Figure 6-18 acceleration and deceleration process schematic jump frequency is effective.

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 5

line | Time | Output Frequency (Hz) | |------|------------------------| | 0 | 0 | | 1 | 1 | | 2 | 2 |

Figure 6-18 acceleration and deceleration process Jump frequency effective schematic

P8-25Acceleration time Acceleration time 1 and 2 switching frequency pointsFactory default 0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
P8-26Deceleration time 2 and deceleration time 1 switching frequency pointFactory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz to maximum frequency

This function is selected as the motor in the motor 1, and not switched by DI terminal when selecting acceleration and deceleration time is valid. For the inverter is running, but not according to the operating frequency range to choose different acceleration and deceleration times by DI terminals.

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 6

line | Time Point | Output Frequency (Hz) | | ---------------------- | --------------------- | | Acceleration time 1 | P8-25 | | Deceleration time 1 | P8-26 | | Deceleration time 2 | 0 |

Figure 6-19 acceleration and deceleration time switch schematic
Figure 6-19 is a schematic view of acceleration and deceleration time switching. During acceleration, if the operating frequency is less than P8-25 selects the acceleration time 2; if the operating frequency is greater than the acceleration time 1. Select P8-25.

During deceleration, if the operating frequency is greater than P8-26 Deceleration Time 1 is selected, if the operating frequency is less than the deceleration time 2 Select P8-26.

P8-27Terminal jog priorityFactory default0
Setting range0: Invalid 1: Valid

This parameter is used to set whether the terminal jogging function has the highest priority.

When the terminal jogging priority effective, if the terminal point move command occurs during operation, the drive is switched to the terminal jogging running.

P8-28Frequency detection value (FDT2)Factory default50.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
P8-29Frequency detection hysteresis value (FDT2)Factory default5.0%
Setting range0.0% ~ 100.0% (FDT2 level)

The frequency detection function FDT1 the same functions FDT1 refer to the instructions that function code P8-19, P8-20 description.

P8-30Any reached frequency detection value 1Factory default50.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
P8-31Any reached frequency detection range 1Factory default0.0%
Setting range0.0% to 100.0% (maximum frequency)
P8-30Any reached frequency detection value 2Factory default50.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
P8-31Any reached frequency detection range 2Factory default0.0%
Setting range0.0% to 100.0% (maximum frequency)

When the output frequency of the inverter, when arriving at any frequency detection value detected positive and negative amplitude range, multi-DO output ON signal.

VFD arrival frequency detection provides two sets of arbitrary parameters were set frequency value and frequency detection range. 6-20 schematic diagram for the function.

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 7

line | Time | Operating Frequency | Frequency Detection Width | |------|---------------------|----------------------------| | OFF | 0 | ON | | OFF | 1.5 | ON | | OFF | 1.5 | ON |

Figure 6-20 arbitrary frequency detection arrival schematic

P8-34Zero-current detection levelFactory default5.0%
Setting range0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)
P8-35Zero-current detection delay timeFactory default0.10s
Setting range0.00s~600.00s

When the inverter output current is less than or equal to zero current detection level and lasts longer than the zero current detection delay time, the inverter output multifunction DO ON signal. Figure 6-21 zero current detection Fig.

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 8

line | Time Point | Output Current | Zero Detection Level | | ---------- | -------------- | --------------------- | | P8-34 | Peak | P8-34 | | P8-35 | ON | P8-35 |

Figure 6-21 Zero current detection schematic

P8-36Output current limit valueFactory default200.0%
Setting range0.0 % (not detected)0.1%~300.0% (motor rated current)
P8-37Output current limit detection delay timeFactory default0.00s
Setting range0.00s~600.00s

When the inverter output current is greater than or overrun detection point, and lasts longer than the software overcurrent detection delay time, the inverter output multifunction DO ON signal Figure 6-22 output current limit function schematic.

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 9

line | Time Point | Output Current | Output Current Overrun Detection Signal | | ---------- | -------------- | ---------------------------------------- | | P8-36 | High | Not labeled | | P8-37 | Low | ON |

Figure 6-22 Output current limit detection schematic

P8-38Any arrival current 1Factory default100.0%
Setting range0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)
P8-39Any arrival current width 1Factory default0.0%
Setting range0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)
P8-40Any arrival current 2Factory default100.0%
Setting range0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)
P8-41Any arrival current width 2Factory default0.0%
Setting range0.0%~300.0% (motor rated current)

When the output current of the inverter, setting the current reach any positive or negative detection width, the inverter output multifunction DO ON signal.

VFD provides two sets of current and any arrival detection width parameter, a functional schematic diagram in Figure 6-23.

MSW FI-7500 - P8 Group--Auxiliary function - 10

line | Time Segment | Output Current | | ------------ | -------------- | | OFF | 0 | | ON | High | | ON | Medium | | OFF | Low | | ON | Medium | | OFF | Low |

Figure 6-23 Schematic diagram of any arrival current detection

P8-42Timing function selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Invalid
1Valid
P8-43Timed Run time selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Setting P8-44
1AI1
2AI2
3AI3
Analog Input Range 100% correspond to P8-44
P8-44Timed Run TimeFactory default0.0Min
Setting range0.0Min~6500.0Min

The set of parameters used to complete the drive timing running function.

When P8-42 timing function selection is valid, the inverter starts the beginning of time, after reaching set the timer run time, the inverter automatically shut down, while multi-function DO output ON signal.

When the drive each time you start, you start counting from 0, time remaining operating time by U0-20 view. Regular operation time set by P8-43, P8-44, the time in minutes.

P8-45All input voltage protection lower limit valuesFactory default3.10V
Setting range0.00V~P8-46
P8-46All input voltage protection upper limit valuesFactory default6.80V
Setting rangeP8-45~10.00V

When the value is greater than the analog input AI1 P8-46, P8-47 less than or AI1 input, the output of the inverter multifunction DO “AI1 input overrun” ON signal for indicating AI1 input voltage is within a set range.

P8-47Module temperature reachedFactory default75°C
Setting range0.00V~P8-46

The inverter heat sink temperature reaches this temperature, the inverter output multifunction DO “module temperature reaches the” ON signal.

P8-48Cooling fan controlFactory default0
Setting range0: fan operates when running1: The fan has been running

It is used to select the cooling fan operation mode selection 0. Inverter fan running in the running state, stop state if the heat sink temperature is higher than 40 degrees then the fan is running, stop state radiator fan is not lower than 40 degrees operation.

Select 1, the fan after power has been running.

P8-49Wake frequencyFactory default0.00Hz
Setting rangeSleep frequency (P8-51) ~ maximum frequency (P0-10)
P8-50Wake-up delay timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~6500.0s
P8-51Sleep frequencyFactory default0.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ wake-frequency (P8-49)
P8-52Sleep latencyFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0s~6500.0s

This group used to implement the water supply system in sleep and wake function.

The inverter is running, when the set frequency is less than or equal P8-51 Sleep frequency, P8-52 after the delay time, the drive goes to sleep, and automatically shut down. If the drive is in a dormant state, and the current run command, when the set frequency greater than or equal frequency wake P8-49, P8-50 after a time delay, the drive started.

In general, set the wake-sleep frequency greater than or equal frequency. Sleep and wake-up frequency setting frequency was 0.00Hz, then sleep and wake up function is invalid.

When hibernation is enabled, if the frequency source using PID, the PID sleep state whether operations by PA-28 affect the function code, in which case you must select the shutdown operation when PID (PA-28 = 1).

P8-53The running time of arrivalFactory default0.0Min
Setting range0.0Min~6500.0Min

When this started running time arrival this time, the inverter multi-function digital output DO “The running time arrival” ON signal.

P9 Group--Fault and Protection

P9-00Motor overload protection selectionFactory default1
Setting range0Ban
1Allow
P9-01Motor overload protection gainFactory default1.00
Setting range0.20~w10.00

P9-00 = 0: No motor overload protection function may present a risk of damage to the motor overheating, the proposed increase thermal relay between the inverter and the motor;

P9-00 = 1: the frequency converter according to the motor overload inverse time curve to determine whether the motor is overloaded. Motor overload inverse time curve: 220% × (P9 - 01) × motor rated current for 1 minute, the alarm of motor overload fault; 150% × (P9 - 01) × rated motor current, the motor 60 minutes the alarm overload.

User according to the actual motor overload, set the correct value of P9-01, this parameter is set too easily lead to motor overheating and the risk of damage to the inverter not alarm!

P9-02Motor overload warning coefficientFactory default 80%
Setting range50%~100%

This function is used before the motor overload fault protection, through DO to the control system a warning signal. The warning coefficient is used to determine, before the motor overload early warning extent. The higher the value the smaller the amount of advance warning.

When the inverter output current cumulative amount greater than overload inverse curves and P9-02 product, multifunction drive DO digital output “motor overload pre-alarm” ON signal.

P9-03Overvoltage stall gainFactory default0
Setting range0 (no overvoltage stall)~100
P9-04Overvoltage stall protection voltageFactory default130%
Setting range120%~150% (threc-phase)

During the deceleration, when the DC bus voltage exceeds the overvoltage stall protection voltage, the inverter stop deceleration is maintained at the current operating frequency, voltage drops until the bus continues to decelerate.

Overvoltage stall gain for adjusting during deceleration, the drive capacity in suppressing the pressure. The bigger the value, the stronger the ability to suppress the overvoltage. Without overvoltage occurs, the gain is set as small as possible.

For small inertia load, over-voltage stall gain should be small, otherwise the system dynamic response slow. For large inertia loads, this value should be large, otherwise the suppression ineffective, overvoltage fault may occur.

Overvoltage stall when the gain is set to 0, the cancellation of overvoltage stall function.

P9-05Over current stall gainFactory default20
Setting range0~100
P9-06Overcurrent stall protection currentFactory default150%
Setting range100%~200%

In the inverter deceleration process, when the output current exceeds the overcurrent stall protection current, the inverter stops deceleration process is maintained at the current operating frequency, output current drops and then continue to be deceleration.

Over-flow speed gain is used to adjust the acceleration and deceleration process, the drive capacity in suppressing the flow. The bigger the value, the stronger the capacity is. In the stream without happened next, the gain is set as small as possible.

For small inertia load, over-current stall gain should be small, otherwise the system dynamic response slow. For large inertia loads, this value should be large, otherwise the suppression ineffective, overcurrent fault may occur.

0 when the stall gain is set to cancel the stall function.

P9-07Power-to-ground short circuit protectionFactory default1
Setting range0 Invalid
1 Valid

Select the inverter at power, detecting whether the motor is shorted to ground.

If this function is active, the UVW side of the inverter after power-output voltage will be a period of time.

P9-09Fault auto reset timesFactory default0
Setting range0~20

When the inverter selects fault auto reset, used to set the number of auto reset. More than this number of times the drive remains a fault condition.

P9-10During the auto-reset fault DO action selectionFactory default1
Setting range0: no action1: Action

If the drive is set up automatic fault reset function, then during automatic fault reset, fault DO whether action can be set by P9-10.

P9-11Fault automatic reset intervalFactory default1.0s
Setting range0.1s~100.0s

Since the inverter fault alarm, automatic fault reset time to wait between.

P9-12Input phase loss protection selectionFactory default1
Setting range0: ban1: allow

Select whether the input phase loss protection.

Inverter 18.5kW G-type machines and more power, have input phase protection, 18.5kW P-type machine less power. Regardless of P9-12 is set to 0 or 1 have no input phase loss protection.

P9-13Output phase loss protection selectionFactory default1
Setting range0: ban1: allow

Choose whether to output phase loss protection.

P9-14The first type of failure0~99
P9-15The second type of failure
P9-16The second (last) fault type

Recording drive last three fault types, 0 is no fault. On possible causes and solutions for each fault code, please refer to Chapter 8 for instructions.

P9-17The second fault frequencyLast frequency fault
P9-18The second fault currentLast fault current
P9-19The second bus voltage failureLast bus voltage fault
P9-20Input terminal status at fault secondLast fault state when the digital input terminals, the order is:BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0DI0 DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1When the input terminals of the corresponding two of N is set to 1, OFF or 0, the status of all DI converted to decimal display.
P9-21The second fault output terminalLast fault state when the digital input terminals, the order is:BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0DO2 DO1 REL2 REL1 FMPWhen the input terminals of the corresponding two of N is set to 1, OFF or 0, the status of all DI converted to decimal display.
P9-22The second fault drive statusRetention
P9-23The second fault power-on timeThe second power-up time of the last fault
P9-24The second fault running timeThe running time of the last fault
P9-27The second fault frequencyThe same with P9-17~P9-24
P9-28The second fault current
P9-29The second bus voltage failure
P9-30Input terminal status at fault second
P9-31The second fault output terminal
P9-32The second fault drive status
P9-33The second fault power-on time
P9-34The second fault running time
P9-37The first fault drive statusThe same with P9-17~P9-24
P9-38The first fault power-on time
P9-39The first fault running time
P9-40The first fault frequency
P9-41The first fault current
P9-42The first bus voltage failure
P9-43Input terminal status at fault first
P9-44The first fault output terminal
P9-47Fault protection action selection 1Factory default00000
Setting rangeSingle digitMotor overload (Err11)
0Freewheel
1Halt according to halt mode
2Continue to run
Ten bitInput phase (Err12) (same unit)
Hundred bitOutput Phase (Err13) (same unit)
Thousand bitExternal fault (Err15) (same unit)
Ten thousand bitCommunication Abnormal (Err16) (same unit)
P9-48Fault protection action selection 2Factory default00000
Setting rangeSingle digitEncoder failure (Err20)
0Freewheel
1Switch to VF, press the stop mode
2Switch to VF, continues to run
Ten bitAbnormal function code reader (Err21)
0Freewheel
1Halt according to halt mode
Hundred bitRetention
Thousand bitMotor overheating (Err 25) (same with P9-47 unit)
Ten thousand bitRunning time arrival (Err26) (same with P9-47 unit)
P9-49Fault protection action selection 3Factory default00000
Setting rangeSingle digitUser-defined fault 1 (Err27) (same with P9-47 unit)
Ten bitUser-defined fault 2 (Err28) (same with P9-47 unit)
Hundred bitPower-on time is reached (Err29) (same with P9-47 unit)
Thousand bitCarrying out (Err30)
0Freewheel
1Halt according to halt mode
2Decelerated to 7% of the rated motor frequency continues to run, can not afford to load automatically returns to the set frequency operation
Ten thousand bitFault protection action selection 4Runtime PID feedback loss (Err31) (same with P9-47 unit)Factory00000
P9-50
Setting rangeSingle digitExcessive speed deviation (Err42) (with P9-47 bits)
Ten bitSuper speed motor (Err43) (with P9-47 bits)
Hundred bitThe initial position error (Err51) (with P9-47 bits)
Thousand bitthe initial position error (Err52) (with P9-47 bits)
Ten thousand bitRetention

When you select "free parking", inverter displays Err **, and directly down.

When selecting the “stop in stopping mode”: The inverter displays A **, press the stop mode, the display Err ** after the shutdown.

When you select the “continue”: drive continues to operate and display A **, the operating frequency is set by the P9-54.

P9-54Continue to run frequency selectionFactory default0
Setting range0In the current operating frequency operation
1Operation in set frequency
2Operation in upper limit frequency
3 Operation in lower limit frequency
4Alternate abnormal frequency operation
P9-55Abnormal alternative frequenciesFactory default100.0%
Setting range60.0%~100.0%

When the inverter is running a fault, and the fault handling is set to continue, the drive display A **, and operates at a frequency determined to P9-54.

When you select an alternate abnormal frequency operation, the value set by P9-55 is a percentage of the maximum frequency.

P9-56Motor temperature sensor typeFactory default0
Setting range0No Temperature Sensor
1PT100
2PT1000
P9-57Motor overheating protection Factory default110°C
Setting range0°C~200°C
F9-58Motor overheating prediction alertFactory default90°C
Setting range0°C~200°C

Temperature signal motor temperature sensor needs to be connected to the multifunction input and output expansion card, which is optional. Analog expansion card input AI3, can be used as motor temperature sensor input, the motor temperature sensor signal then AI3, PGND terminal.

VFD AI3 analog inputs of PT100 and PT1000 supports two kinds of motor temperature sensor, the sensor must be set to the correct type of use. Motor temperature values are displayed in the U0-34.

When the motor temperature exceeds the motor overheating protection threshold P9-57, inverter fault alarm, fault protection action and processed according to the selected mode.

When the motor temperature exceeds the threshold P9-58 motor overheating forecast, the drive multifunction digital output DO Motor overtemperature pre-alarm ON signal.

P9-59Instantaneous stop action selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Invalid
1Slow down
2Slowdown stop
P9-60Momentary power failure deceleration frequency switching pointFactory default0.0%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%
P9-61Instantaneous power voltage recovery judgment timeFactory default0.50s
Setting range0.00s~100.00s
P9-62Instantaneous stop non-stop action judgment voltageFactory default80.0%
Setting range60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage)

This feature means that in an instant power failure or a sudden drop in voltage, the inverter by reducing the output speed, back to reduce the load energy compensation inverter DC bus voltage to maintain the drive continues to run.

If P9-59 = 1, the instantaneous power failure or a sudden drop in voltage, the inverter deceleration, when the bus voltage is restored, the drive accelerates to the set frequency normal operation. Analyzing the bus voltage returns to normal is based on the normal bus voltage P9-61 and lasts longer than the set time

If P9-59 = 2, the instantaneous power failure or a sudden drop in voltage, the inverter will decelerate to a stop

MSW FI-7500 - P9 Group--Fault and Protection - 1

line | Time Point | Busbar Voltage | Instantaneous Power Failure Action | Operating Frequency Change | | ---------- | -------------- | ----------------------------------- | -------------------------- | | P9-61 | High | Low | - | | P9-59=1 | Low | High | Slow down | | P9-59=2 | Low | Medium | Gear down |

Figure 6-24 Schematic diagram of instantaneous power failure

P9-63Load missing protection selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Invalid
1Valid
P9-64Load missing detection levelFactory default10.0%
Setting range0.0%~100.0% (motor rated current)
P9-65Load missing testing timeFactory default1.0s
Setting range0.0s~60.0s

If the load missing protection function is enabled, when the inverter output current is less than carrying out the detection level P9-64, and the duration is greater than the load loss detection time P9-65 when the output frequency is automatically reduced to 7% of the nominal frequency. During the off-load protection, if the load is restored, the drive automatically reverts to run at a set frequency.

P9-67Over-speed detection valueFactory default15.0%
Setting range 0.0% to 50.0% (maximum frequency)
P9-68Over-speed detection timeFactory default2.0s
Setting range0.0s~60.0s

This function is only effective when the inverter running has speed sensor vector control.

When the drive detects the actual speed of the motor exceeds a set frequency, greater than the value exceeds the overspeed detection value P9-67, and the duration is greater than the over-speed detection time P9-68, the inverter fault alarm Err43, according to the fault and the protection mode deal with.

P9-69Excessive speed deviation detectionFactory default20.0%
Setting range 0.0% to 50.0% (maximum frequency)
P9-70Excessive speed deviation detectionFactory default2.0s
Setting range0.0s~60.0s

This function is only effective when the inverter running has speed sensor vector control.

When the drive detects the actual speed of the motor and set frequency deviation, the deviation is greater than the speed deviation detection value P9-69, and the duration is greater than the speed deviation detection time P9-70, the inverter fault alarm Err42, and processed according to the operation mode fault protection.

When the speed deviation detection time is 0.0s, cancel the speed deviation fault detection.

PA Group--Process control PID function

PID control is a common method of process control by the controlled amount of the difference between the amount of the feedback signal and the target signal is proportional, integral, differential operation by adjusting the output frequency to form a closed-loop system, so that the amount charged in the stable target value.

Suitable for flow control, pressure control and temperature control and process control applications, PID control process block diagram of Figure 6-25.

MSW FI-7500 - PA Group--Process control PID function - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Target volume"] --> B["×"]
    B --> C["Td*s+1"]
    C --> D["+"]
    D --> E["P"]
    E --> F["PID Output control"]
    F --> G["Feedback quantity"]
    G --> B
    H["1"] --> I["Ti S"]
    I --> D
    J["1"] --> K["Td*s+1"]
    K --> D

Figure 6-25 Principle block diagram of process PID

PA-00PID given sourceFactory default0
Setting range0PA-01 Set up
1AI1
2 AI2
3 AI3
4Pulse (DI5)
5Communication
6Multi-step instructions
PA-01PID values givenFactory default50.0%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%

This parameter is used to select target process PID given channel.

Set a target amount of process PID is a relative value, setting range 0.0% to 100.0%. The same amount is relatively PID feedback amount, PID is the role of these two relatively the same amount.

PA-02PID feedback sourceFactory default0
Setting range0AI1
1AI2
2AI3
3AI1-AI2
4Pulse (DI5)
5Communication
6AI1+AI2
7MAX (|AI1|,|AI2|)
8MIN (|AI1|,|AI2|)

This parameter is used to select the process PID feedback signal path.

Process PID feedback amount for the relative value is set in the range of 0.0% to 100.0%.

PA-03PID action directionFactory default0
Setting range0Positive action
1reaction

R Positive effect: When the PID feedback signal is less than a given amount, the inverter output frequency rises. Such as winding tension control applications.

Reaction: When the PID feedback signal is less than a given amount, the output frequency decreases. As Unwinding tension control applications. The impact of the multi-function terminal function by PID action direction negated (function 35), the use of that need attention.

PA-04PID given feedback rangeFactory default1000
Setting range0~65535

PID given feedback range is dimensionless units for a given display U0-15 PID and PID feedback display U0-16. Given relative value of feedback PID 100.0%, corresponding to a given feedback range PA-04. For example if the PA-40 is set to 2000, then when PID given 100.0%, PID given display U0-15 2000.

PA-05Proportional gain Kp 1Factory default20.0
Setting range0.0~100.0
PA-06Integration time Ti 1Factory default2.00s
Setting range0.01s~10.00s
PA-07Differential time Td 1Factory default0.000s
Setting range0.00~10.000

Proportional gain Kp 1

Adjusting the intensity of the entire decision PID regulator, Kp1 the greater the greater the intensity. 100.0 This parameter indicates when the PID feedback value and a given amount of deviation of 100.0% when, PID controller to adjust the amplitude of the output frequency command is the maximum frequency.

Integration time Ti 1 Determine the intensity of PID regulator integral adjustment. The shorter the integration time adjustment intensity is. Integration time is when PID feedback quantity and given quantity of deviation of 100.0% of the time integral regulator continuous adjustment in the amount of the maximum frequency.

Differential time Td 1 PID regulator determines the rate of change of the deviation adjustment strength. Differential longer adjustment intensity is. Derivative time refers to the amount of change when the feedback 100.0% during that time, to adjust the amount of the differential regulator for the maximum frequency.

PA-08PID reverse cut-off frequencyFactory default2.00Hz
Setting range 0.00 ~ maximum frequency

In some cases, only when the PID output frequency is negative (ie, the drive reverse), PID is possible to control the amount of a given quantity and feedback to the same state, but the high frequency inversion is not allowed on some occasions the, PA-08 is used to determine the inversion frequency cap.

PA-09PID deviation limitFactory default0.01%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%

When the PID deviation and feedback value is less than PA-09, PID stops adjustment operation. Thus, given the time and the feedback output frequency deviation of less stable and unchanging, closed-loop control on some occasions very effective.

PA-10PID differential limitingFactory default0.10%
Setting range0.00%~100.00%

PID regulator, the differential effect is more sensitive and is likely to cause system oscillation, therefore, generally regarded PID derivative action is limited to a relatively small area, PA-10 is used to set the PID differential output range.

PA-11PID given change timeFactory default0.00s
Setting range0.00s~650.00s

PID given time changes, referring to PID setpoint changes from the 0.0% to 100.0% the time required.

When PID given change, PID setpoint changes linearly with time according to a given change, reduce the adverse effects of a given mutation on the system caused.

PA-12PID feedback filter timeFactory default0.00s
Setting range0.00s~60.00s
PA-13PID output filter timeFactory default0.00s
Setting range0.00s~60.00s

PA-12 for PID feedback filtering, the filter help to reduce the impact of the amount of feedback is disturbed, but the process will bring the response performance of the closed loop system.

PA-13 for PID output frequency filter, the filter will decrease the output frequency of the mutation, but it will also bring the performance of the process in response to the closed loop system.

PA-15Proportional gain Kp 2Factory default20.0
Setting range0.0~100.0
PA-16Integration time Ti 2Factory default2.00s
Setting range0.01s~10.00s
PA-17Differential time Td 2Factory default0.000s
Setting range0.00~10.000
PA-18PID parameters switchingFactory default0
Setting range0 Not switch
1 By DI terminal switch
2Automatic switching based on bias
PA-19PID parameter switchingFactory default20.0%
Setting range0.0%~PA-20
PA-20PID parameter switchingFactory default80.0%
Setting rangePA-19~100.0%

In some applications, a set of PID parameters can not meet the needs of the entire operation, and require different PID parameters under different circumstances.

This function code is used to switch two sets of PID parameters. Wherein the regulator parameter PA-15 is set up \~ PA-17, the parameter PA-05 \~ PA-07 is similar.

Two sets of PID parameters can be switched by multifunction digital terminals DI can also be automatically switched according to the deviation of PID.

When choosing a multifunction DI terminal switching, multi-function terminal function selection set to 43 (PID parameters switching terminal), select the parameter set 1 (PA-05 \~ PA-07) when the terminal is invalid, the terminal is valid parameter set selection 2 (PA-15 \~ PA-17).

Choose to automatically switch between the reference and feedback deviation is less than the absolute value of PID parameter switching deviation 1 PA-19 when, PID parameter selection parameter set 1. To a deviation between the reference and the PID feedback is greater than the absolute value of the deviation switch 2 PA-20 Shi, PID parameters select the parameter set 2. To a deviation between the reference and the feedback is switched when the deviation between 1 and switching deviation 2, PID parameters for the two sets of PID parameters of the linear interpolation value, as shown in Figure 6-26.

MSW FI-7500 - Proportional gain Kp 1 - 1

line | PID parameter | PID deviation | | :--- | :--- | | PID parameter1 | PA-05, PA-06, PA-07 | | PID parameter2 | PA-15, PA-16, PA-17 | | PID deviation | PA-19, PA-20 |

Figure 6-26 PID parameter switching

PA-21Initial PIDFactory default0.0%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%
PA-22PID Initial Hold TimeFactory default0.00s
Setting range0.00s~650.00s

When the inverter starts, PID PID output is fixed at the initial value PA-21, continuous PID initial value PA-22 after the holding time, PID loop adjustment operation began.

Figure 6-27 is the initial value of the PID function schematic.

MSW FI-7500 - Proportional gain Kp 1 - 2

line | time | output frequency | | ---- | ---------------- | | 0 | 0 | | Peak | High | | 22 | Low |

Figure 6-27 is the initial value of the PID function schematic.

This function is used to limit the difference between the two beat PID output (2ms / beat) between the PID output in order to suppress the change too fast, so that the inverter operation to stabilize.

PA-23Twice forward bias maximumFactory default1.00%
Setting range0.00%~100.00%
PA-24Twice forward bias maximumFactory default1.00%
Setting range0.00%~100.00%

PA-23 and PA-24, respectively, and the maximum deviation of the output forward and reverse when the absolute value.

PA-25PID integral propertyFactory default00
Setting rangeSingle digitIntegral Separation
0 Invalid
1 Valid
Ten bitIntegral to whether to stop the output limit after
0 Continued integration
1 Stop Points

Points separation:

If you set the integral separation effective, when multifunction digital integrator DI pause (function 22) is valid, PID integral PID integral stop operation, only this time PID proportional and derivative actions effective.

When selecting integral separation to be invalid, regardless of whether the DI digital multifunction effective, integral separation are not valid. Integral to whether to stop the output limit after: After PID operation output reaches a maximum or minimum, you can choose whether to stop the integral action. If you choose to stop the integration, at this time PID integral calculation is stopped, which may help reduce the PID overshoot.

PA-26PID feedback loss detection valueFactory default0.0%
Setting range 0.0%: do not judge feedback loss
PA-27PID feedback loss detection timeFactory default1.0s
Setting range0.0s~20.0s

This function code is used to determine whether the loss of PID feedback.

When PID feedback is smaller than the feedback loss detection value of PA-26, and lasts longer than PID feedback loss detection time PA-27, the inverter alarm fault Err31, and troubleshooting process according to the selected mode.

PA-28PID stoppage operationFactory default0
Setting range0Do not stop operation
1 Stoppage operation

PID is used to select the next stop status, PID whether to continue operations. General applications at standstill PID should stop operation.

PB Group--Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Counting

Traverse function used in textile, chemical fiber industry, and the need to traverse, winding functions are required. Wobble function means that the inverter output frequency to set the frequency for the center swing up and down, the operating frequency of the track in the timeline.

As shown in Figure 6-28, which swings by the PB-00 and PB-01 set, when PB-01 is set to 0 swing 0, then wobble does not work.

MSW FI-7500 - PB Group--Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Counting - 1

line | Time Segment | Event Description | | ------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | | Start | Run command | | Peak 1 | Upper frequency of swing frequency | | Peak 2 | Center frequency Fset | | Peak 3 | Lower frequency of swing frequency | | Peak 4 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 5 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 6 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 7 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 8 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 9 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 10 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 11 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 12 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 13 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 14 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 15 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 16 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 17 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 18 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 19 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 20 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 21 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 22 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 23 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 24 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 25 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 26 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 27 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 28 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 29 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 30 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 31 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 32 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 33 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 34 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 35 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 36 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 37 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 38 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 39 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 40 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 41 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 42 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 43 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 44 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 45 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 46 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 47 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 48 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 49 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 50 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 51 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 52 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 53 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 54 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 55 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 56 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 57 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 58 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 59 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 60 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 61 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 62 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 63 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 64 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 65 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 66 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 67 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 68 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 69 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 70 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 71 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 72 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 73 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 74 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 75 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 76 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 77 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 78 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 79 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 80 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 81 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 82 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 83 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 84 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 85 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 86 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 87 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 88 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 89 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 90 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 91 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 92 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 93 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 94 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 95 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 96 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 97 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 98 | Frequency of textile process | | Peak 99 | Frequency of textile process | | End | Run command |

Figure 6-28 Working diagram of frequency swing

PB-00Radiometric way swingFactory default0
Setting range0corresponding to central frequency
1Respect to the maximum frequency

This parameter is determined by reference to the amount of swing.

0: relative to the center frequency (P0-07 frequency source), a variable-swing system. Swing with the center frequency (set frequency) change.

1: Relative maximum frequency (P0-10), the system is constant swing, swing fixed.

PB-01Wobble amplitudeFactory default0.0%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%
PB-02Kick frequency amplitudeFactory default0.0%
Setting range0.0%~50.0%

To determine the value of the swing and kick frequency value of this parameter.

When set to swing relative to the center frequency (PB-00 = 0), the swing AW = frequency source P0-07 × swing amplitude PB-01. When set to swing with respect to the maximum frequency (PB-00 = 1), the maximum frequency swing AW = P0-10 × swing amplitude PB-01.

Kick frequency amplitude of traverse run, the kick frequency relative to the frequency swing percentage, namely: kick frequency = swing AW × kick frequency amplitude PB-02. If the swing amplitude relative to the center frequency (PB-00 = 0), the kick frequency is a variable value. As selected swing relative to the maximum frequency (PB-00 = 1), the kick frequency is a fixed value.

Wobble operating frequency, maximum frequency and minimum frequency is bound by.

PB-03Wobble cycleFactory default10.0s
Setting range0.0s~3000.0s
PB-04Triangular wave rise time coefficientFactory default50.0%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%

Swing frequency cycle: a complete wobble cycle time value.

Triangular wave rise time coefficient PB-04, a triangular wave rising relatively wobble cycle PB-03 percentage of the time. Triangular wave rise time = Swing frequency cycle PB-03 × triangular wave rising time coefficient PB-04, in seconds. Triangular wave falling time = Swing frequency cycle PB-03 × (1- triangle wave rise time coefficient PB-04), in seconds.

PB-05Set lengthFactory default1000m
Setting range0m~65535m
PB-06Actual lengthFactory default0m
Setting range0m~65535m
PB-07Number of pulses per meterFactory default100.0
Setting range0.1~6553.5

The above function codes for fixed-length control.

Length information you need to enter through the multifunction digital terminal acquisition, the number of sampling pulses terminals and the number of pulses per meter PB-07 phase in addition calculated to give actual length PB-06. When the actual length is greater than the set length PB-05, multi-function digital output DO “Length arrival” ON signal.

Fixed length control process, by multi-function terminal DI carried out the length of the reset operation (DI function selection 28). Please refer to P4-00 \~ P4-09.

Applications need to set the corresponding input terminal function set to “length count input” (function 27), at higher pulse frequency must be used DI5 port.

PB-08Set count valueFactory default1000
Setting range1~65535
PB-09Designated counting valueFactory default1000
Setting range1~65535

The count value required by multifunction digital input terminal acquisition. Applications need to set the corresponding input terminal function set to “counter input” (function 25), at higher pulse frequency must be used DI5 port.

When the count value reaches the set count value PB-08, multi-function digital output DO “reaching the set count” ON signal, then stop counting.

When the count reaches the designated counting value PB-09, the multi-function digital output DO “reaching the set count” ON signal, when the counting continues until “set count value” counter stopped.

Specified count number PB-09 should not be greater than the set counter value PB-08. Figure 6-29 is reaching the set count and the count value of the specified schematic reach capabilities.

MSW FI-7500 - PB Group--Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Counting - 2

text_image count pulse DI5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Set count DO1 Specified counter relay

Figure 6-29 Set the number of values given and the specified value of the given diagram

PC Group--multi-section instructions and simple PLC function

Multi-stage instruction VFD than usual multispeed richer function, in addition to multi-speed function, but also can be used as VF isolated voltage source and a given source of process PID. To this end, the relative values of dimensionless multistage instruction.

Simple PLC function is different from the VFD user-programmable features, easy PLC can only be done on a simple combination of multi-step instructions to run. And user-programmed functions to be richer and more useful, please refer to the A7 group instructions.

PC-00Multi-stage instruction 0Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-01Multi-stage instruction 1Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-02Multi-stage instruction 2Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-03Multi-stage instruction 3Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-04Multi-stage instruction 4Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-05Multi-stage instruction 5Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-06Multi-stage instruction 6Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-07Multi-stage instruction 7Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-08Multi-stage instruction 8Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-09Multi-stage instruction 9Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-10Multi-stage instruction 10Factory default0.0Hz
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-11Multi-stage instruction 11Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-12Multi-stage instruction 12Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-13Multi-stage instruction 13Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-14Multi-stage instruction 14Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
PC-15Multi-stage instruction 15Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%

Multi-step instructions can be used on three occasions: as the frequency source, as VF separate voltage source, as a process PID setting source.

Under three applications, multi-stage instruction dimensionless relative value, range -100.0% to 100.0%. When the frequency source as a percentage of its maximum relative frequency; VF as a separate voltage source, relative to the rated motor voltage percentage; and because PID originally given as a relative value, multi-source does not command as PID set dimension conversion.

Multi-step instruction required depending on the status of multi-function digital DI and switching options, please refer to the P4 group specific instructions.

PC-16Simple PLC operation modeFactory default0
Setting range0Stop at the end of single running
1End of single running holding final value
2Been circulating

Simple PLC function has two roles: as the frequency source or as VF separate voltage source.

Figure 6-30 is a simplified schematic diagram of the PLC as the frequency source. When simple PLC as the frequency source, PC-00 \~ PC-15 determines the direction of the positive and negative, negative if it means running the drive in the opposite direction.

MSW FI-7500 - PC Group--multi-section instructions and simple PLC function - 1

line | Time Segment | Label | Value | | ------------ | --------- | ----- | | PC-19 | PC-19 | High | | PC-21 | PC-21 | Medium| | PC-00 | PC-00 | High | | FC-01 | FC-01 | Low | | PC-02 | PC-02 | High | | PC-18 | PC-18 | Low | | PC-20 | PC-20 | Low | | PC-23 | PC-23 | Low | | PC-14 | PC-14 | High | | PC-15 | PC-15 | High | | 250m spulse | 250m spulse | Low |

Figure6-30 Schematic diagram of simple PLC

As the frequency source, PLC operates in three ways, as a voltage source does not have VF separation of these three ways. among them:

0: stop at the end of single running

The drive to complete a single cycle stops automatically give a run command to start again.

1: One end of the run to keep the value of the final drive to complete a single cycle, automatically keep running frequency and direction of the last segment.
2: After the cycle has been completed a drive cycle, the next cycle starts automatically, until the stop command to stop.

PC-17Simple PLC power down memory selectionFactory default00
Setting rangeSingle digitPower-down memory selection
0Memory is not down
1Power off memory
Ten bitStop memory selection
0Memory does not stop
1Stop memory

PLC down memory refers to memory before running down phase and frequency PLC running, the next phase will continue to run memory at power-up. Choose not to remember, then every power restart PLC process.

PLC shutdown memory is recorded once before shutdown phase and running frequency PLC running, the next phase will continue to run the memory at runtime. Choose not to remember, every time you restart the PLC process starts.

PC-18Simple PLC running time of segment 0Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-19Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 0Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-20Simple PLC running time of segment 1Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-21Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 1Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-22Simple PLC running time of segment 2Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-23Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 2Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-24Simple PLC running time of segment 3Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-25Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 3Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-26Simple PLC running time of segment 4Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-27Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 4Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-28Simple PLC running time of segment 5Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-29Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 5Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-30Simple PLC running time of segment 6Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-31Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 6Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-32Simple PLC running time of segment 7Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-33Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 7Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-34Simple PLC running time of segment 8Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-35Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 8Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-36Simple PLC running time of segment 9Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-37Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 9Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-38Simple PLC running time of segment 10Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-39Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 10Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-40Simple PLC running time of segment 11Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-41Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 11Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-42Simple PLC running time of segment 12Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-43Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 12Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-44Simple PLC running time of segment 13Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-45Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 13Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-46Simple PLC running time of segment 14Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-47Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 14Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-48Simple PLC running time of segment 15Factory default0.0s (h)
Setting range0.0s (h) ~6553.5s (h)
PC-49Simple PLC deceleration time of segment 15Factory default0
Setting range0~3
PC-50Simple PLC run time unitFactory default0
Setting range0S (s)
1h (h)
PC-5Multi-segment instruction 0 given modeFactory default0
Setting range0Function code FC-00 given
1AI1
2AI2
3AI3
4Pulse
5PID
6Preset frequency (P0-08) given, UPTOWN editable

This parameter determines the multi-0 instruction given channel.

Multi-step instructions 0 PC-00 can be selected in addition, there are many other options to facilitate between multiple short instructions given with the other mode switching. When the multi-frequency source or instruction as simple as a PLC frequency source, can easily switch between the two to achieve frequency source.

PD Group--Communication parameters

Refer to VFD protocol

PE Group--Custom function code

PE-00User Function Code 0Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-01User Function Code 1Factory defaultP0.02
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-02User Function Code 2Factory defaultP0.03
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-03User Function Code 3Factory defaultP0.07
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-04User Function Code 4Factory defaultP0.08
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-05User Function Code 5Factory defaultP0.17
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-06User Function Code 6Factory defaultP0.18
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-07User Function Code 7Factory defaultP3.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-08User Function Code 8Factory defaultP3.01
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-09User Function Code 9Factory defaultP4.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-10User Function Code 10Factory defaultP4.01
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-11User Function Code 11Factory defaultP4.02
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-12User Function Code 12Factory defaultP5.04
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-13User Function Code 13Factory defaultP5.07
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-14User Function Code 14Factory defaultP6.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-15User Function Code 15Factory defaultP6.10
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-16User Function Code 16Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-17User Function Code 17Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-18User Function Code 18Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-19User Function Code 19Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-20User Function Code 20Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-21User Function Code 21Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-22User Function Code 22Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-23User Function Code 23Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-24User Function Code 24Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-25User Function Code 25Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-26User Function Code 26Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-27User Function Code 27Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-28User Function Code 28Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx
PE-29User Function Code 29Factory defaultP0.00
Setting rangeP0.00~PP.xx, A0.00~Ax.xx, U0.xx

This function code is customized parameter set.

Users can all VFD function code, select the desired parameter aggregated into PE group, as a user customized parameters for easy viewing and changing operations.

PE group provides up to 30 custom parameter, PE group parameter display is P0.00, it means that the user function code is empty. When entering custom parameters mode, display the function code PE-00 \~ PE-31 is defined by the order consistent with the PE group function code, skip to P0-00

PP Group--User password

PP-00User PasswordFactory default0
Setting range0~65535

PP-00 to set an arbitrary non-zero number, the password protection function. The next time you enter the menu, you must enter the correct password, or can not view and modify function parameters, please remember the password set by the user.

PP-00 is set to 00000, then clear the user password set, the password protection function is invalid.

PP-01Parameter InitializationFactory default0
Setting range0No operation
1Restore factory settings, not including the motor parameters
2Clear History Information
4Current backup user parameters
501Recover user backup parameters
  1. Restore factory settings, excluding motor parameters

PP-01 is set to 1, most inverter function parameters are restored to the factory default parameters, but motor parameters, frequency command decimal point (P0-22), fault recording information, total running time (P7-09), the cumulative power time (P7-13), the total power consumption (P7-14) is not restored.

  1. Clear History Information

Clear fault record information drive, total running time (P7-09), the cumulative power-up time (P7-13), the total power consumption (P7-14).

  1. The current parameter backup user

The current backup parameters set by the user. The current value of all settings function parameters back down. To facilitate customers in the parameter adjustment disorder after recovery.

501, restore the user parameters previously backed up user parameters backup recovery, the recovery by setting PP-01 for the four backup parameter.

PP-02Function parameter display propertiesFactory default11
Setting rangeSingle digitU group display selection
0Do not show
1Show
Ten bit A group display selection
0Do not show
1Show
PP-02Function parameter display propertiesFactory default11
Setting rangeSingle digitU group display selection
0Do not show
1Show
Ten bit A group display selection
0Do not show
1Show

Set up parameter display mode is mainly based on the actual user needs to view a different arrangement in the form of function parameters, provides three parameters display,

NameDescription
Function parameters modeSequential display drive parameters, respectively, P0 ~ PF, A0 ~ AF, U0 ~ UF parameter group
Customized parametrical mode by usersIndividual function parameters customized display (up to 32 customized), FE user group to determine the function of the parameters to be displayed
Parameter changing mode by usersInconsistent with the factory parameter function parameters

When the character mode display selection parameter (PP-03) when there is a show, this time can be switched to different parameters by QSM key display mode, the default is the only function parameter display.

Parameter display modeshow
Function parameters mode-hASF
Customized parametrical mode by users-USEr
Parameter changing mode by users--Γ--

Each parameter display mode displays coded as:

VFD offers two personalized parameter display mode: The user customized parameters, the user change the parameter mode. Customized parameter sets for the user to set the parameters of PE group, you can select the maximum 32 parameters, which are aggregated together, customers can easily debug.

User customized parameters manner, before custom function code to add a default symbol u example: P1-00, in the custom parameter mode, the display for the user to change parameters for the uP1-00 way for users and manufacturers have to change in order to factory setting different parameters. User parameter set change in favor of the customer to view a summary of the parameters change, facilitate on-site to find the problem.

The user change the parameter mode, before the custom function code to add a default symbol c

For example: P1-00, change parameters in the user mode, the display is as cP1-00

PP-04Function code to modify the propertiesFactory default0
Setting range0Can be modified
1Unmodifiable

Whether the user function code parameter setting can be modified to prevent the risk of function parameters are mistakenly altered.

The function code is set to 0, all the function codes can be modified; while set to 1, all the function codes are only view can not be modified.

A0 Group --Torque control group and define parameters

A0-00Speed / torque control mode selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Speed Control
1Torque Control

For selecting inverter control mode: Speed control or torque control.

DI VFD multifunction digital terminals, and has two functions associated with torque control: Torque control disabled (function 29), speed control / torque control switching (function 46). These two terminals keep A0-00 in conjunction to achieve switching speed and torque control.

When the speed control / torque control switch terminal is invalid, the control mode is determined by the A0-00, if speed control / torque control switch is active, the control mode is equivalent to the value of A0-00 negated.

In any case, when the torque control prohibition terminal is valid, inverter fixed speed control.

A0-01Torque in torque control mode setting source selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Number setting (A0-03)
1AI1
2AI2
3AI3
4Pulse
5Communication given
6MIN (AI1, AI2)
7MAX (AI1, AI2)
A0-03Torque number setting in torque control modeFactory default0
Setting range-200.0%~200.0%

A0-01 torque setting is used to select the source, a total of 8 torque setting mode.

Torque setting using a relative value, corresponding to 100.0% inverter rated torque. Setting range -200.0% to 200.0%, indicating that the inverter maximum torque is 2 times the rated drive torque.

When the torque setting by way of 1 to 7, communications, analog input, pulse input of 100% corresponds to A0-03.

A0-05Torque control positive maximumFactory default50.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency (P0-10)
A0-06Torque control negative maximumFactory default50.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency (P0-10)

It is used to set the torque control mode, the drive forward or reverse maximum operating frequency.

When the drive torque control, if the load torque is less than the output torque of the motor, the motor speed will continue to rise, in order to prevent the mechanical system appears coaster accidents, it must be limited to the maximum torque of the motor speed control.

A0-07Torque control acceleration timeFactory default0.00s
Setting range0.00s~65000s
A0-08Torque control deceleration timeFactory default0.00s
Setting range0.00s~65000s

Torque control mode, the motor output torque and load torque difference determines the speed and rate of change of the motor load, so it is possible to quickly change the motor speed, causing noise or excessive mechanical stress and other issues. By setting the torque control acceleration and deceleration time, the motor speed can be so gradual change.

However, the need for rapid response in case of torque, set the torque control acceleration and deceleration time is 0.00s. For example: Two hard-wired motor drag the same load, to ensure that the load is evenly distributed, set up a drive for the host, using the speed control mode, the drive from another machine and using the actual output torque control switch, host moments torque command as a slave, this time the torque required to follow the host machine's fast, slave torque control acceleration and deceleration time is 0.00s.

A2 Group--2 ^nd motor

VFD can be switched between two motor, two motors can be set to the motor nameplate, respectively, can be the motor parameter tuning, respectively, can be selected VF control or vector control, you can set the encoder parameters, respectively, may be provided with VF control alone or vector control performance related parameters.

A2 group function code corresponds to the motor 2.

At the same time, all the parameters A2 group, the definition and use of its contents are consistent with the parameters of the 1^st motor, not repeated here, the user can refer to the first motor-related parameter description.

A2-00Motor type selectionFactory default0
Setting range0General induction motor
1Variable frequency induction motor
A2-01Rated powerFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0.1kW~1000.0kW
A2-02rated voltageFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range1V~400V
A2-03Rated currentFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0.01A~655.35A(frequency converter power <=55kW) 0.1A~6553.5A(frequency converter power >55kW)
A2-04rated frequencyFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0.01Hz~Maximum frequency
A2-05rated speedFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range1rpm~65535rpm
A2-06Induction motor stator resistanceFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0.001Ω~65.535Ω(frequency converter power <=55kW)0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω(frequency converter power >55kW)
A2-07Rotor resistance of induction motorFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0.001Ω~65.535Ω(frequency converter power <=55kW)0.0001Ω~6.5535Ω(frequency converter power >55kW)
A2-08The leakage inductance of asynchronous motorFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0.01mH~655.35mH(frequency converter power <=55kW)0.001mH~65.535mH(frequency converter power >55kW)
A2-09Induction motor mutual inductanceFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0.1mH~6553.5mH(frequency converter power <=55kW) 0.01mH~655.35mH(frequency converter power >55kW)
A2-10No-load current of induction motorFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0.01A~A2-03(frequency converter power <=55kW)0.1A~A2-03(frequency converter power >55kW)
A2-27Encoder line numberFactory default1024
Setting range1~65535
A2-28Speed fbk selFactory default0
Setting range0ABZ incremental encoder
Retention
1Rotating transformer
A2-29Speed feedback PG selectionFactory default0
Setting range0Local PG
1Extension PG
2PULSE pulse input (DI5)
A2-30ABZ incremental encoder AB sequenceFactory default0
Setting range0forward direction
1reverse
A2-34Pole pairs of rotating transformerFactory default1
Setting range1~65535
A2-36Speed feedback PG disconnection detection timeFactory default0.0s
Setting range0.0: failure to actuate0.1s~10.0s
A2-37Tuning selectionFactory default0
Setting range0No operation
1Asynchronous machine static tuning
2Full tuning of asynchronous machines
A2-38Speed loop proportional gain 1Factory default30
Setting range1~100
A2-39Speed loop integral time 1Factory default0.50s
Setting range0.01s~10.00s
A2-40Switching frequency 1Factory default5.00Hz
Setting range0.00~A2-43
A2-41Speed loop proportional gain 2Factory default15
Setting range0~100
A2-42Speed loop integral time 2Factory default1.00s
Setting range0.01s~10.00s
A2-43Switching frequency 2Factory default10.00Hz
Setting rangeA2-40~Maximum output frequency
A2-44Vector control transfer gainFactory default100%
Setting range50%~200%
A2-45Velocity loop filter time constantFactory default0.000s
Setting range0.000s~0.100s
A2-46Vector control over excitation gainFactory default64
Setting range0~200
A2-47Speed control mode of the torque limit sourceFactory default0
Setting range0A2-48 setting
1AI1
2AI2
3AI3
4PULSE setting
5Communication setting
6MIN (AI1,AI2)
7MAX (AI1,AI2)
A2-48Speed control mode digital setting of torque limitFactory default150.0%
Setting range0.0%~200.0%
A2-51Excitation regulator proportional gainFactory default2000
Setting range0~20000
A2-52Excitation regulation integral gainFactory default1300
Setting range0~20000
A2-53Torque control proportional gainFactory default2000
Setting range0~20000
A2-54Torque control integral gainFactory default1300
Setting range0~20000
A2-55Velocity loop integral propertyFactory default0
Setting rangeSingle digit: Integral separation0 : invalid1 : valid
A2-61Second motor control modeFactory default0
Setting range0Speed sensorless vector control (SVC)
1Speed sensor vector control (FVC)
2V/F control
A2-62Second motor plus deceleration time selectionFactory default0
Setting range0The same as the first motor
1Plus deceleration time 1
2Plus deceleration time 2
3Plus deceleration time 3
4Plus deceleration time 4
A2-63Second motor torqueFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0.0% : Automatic torque lifting0.1%~30.0%
A2-65Second motor oscillation suppression gainFactory defaultModel determination
Setting range0~100

A5 Group-- Control optimization parameters

A5-00DPWM switching frequencyFactory default12.00Hz
Setting range0.00Hz~15Hz

It is only valid for VF control. Hair wave asynchronous machine VF runtime determine, below this value to 7-segment continuous modulation scheme, on the contrary, compared with 5 of intermittent modulation.

7-segment continuous modulation of the inverter switching loss is large, but it will bring the current ripple is small; 5 paragraph intermittent debug mode switching loss is small, a large current ripple; but at high frequencies may cause instability motor, generally do not need to be modified.

About VF run instability refer to function code P3-11, loss and temperature rise on the drive, please refer to the function code P0-15;

A5-01PWM modulationFactory default0
Setting range0Asynchronous modulation
1Synchronous modulation

It is only valid for VF control. Synchronous modulation means converting the carrier frequency as the output frequency varies linearly, to ensure both the ratio (carrier ratio) unchanged, generally at higher output frequencies to use, in favor of the quality of the output voltage.

In the lower output frequency (100Hz or less), generally you do not need synchronous modulation, because the ratio of the carrier frequency and the output frequency is relatively high, some of the more obvious advantages of asynchronous modulation.

Running frequency higher than 85Hz, synchronous modulation to take effect, the frequency of the following fixed asynchronous modulation mode.

A5-02Dead compensation mode selectionFactory default1
Setting range0Without compensation
1Compensation Mode 1
2Compensation Mode 2

Generally do not need to modify this parameter, only when the output voltage waveform quality have special requirements, or other abnormal motor oscillation, you need to try to switch to select different compensation models.

Mode 2 is recommended to use high-power compensation.

A5-03Random PWM DepthFactory default0
Setting range0Random PWM invalid
1~10PWM carrier frequency random depth

Set random PWM, the motor can be monotonous shrill voice becomes softer and can help reduce the external electromagnetic interference.

When set to 0 random PWM depth, random PWM invalid. Different depth adjustment random PWM will get different results.

A5-04Enable fast limitingFactory default1
Setting range0Not enable
1Enable

Enable fast current limiting function can reduce the maximum drive overcurrent fault occurs. The drive to ensure uninterrupted operation. If the drive for a long period in the fast current limit, the inverter may overheat and other damage, and this is not allowed.

So long drive quickly when the alarm limit fault Err40, indicating that the inverter overload and downtime.

A5-05Current detection compensationFactory default5
Setting range0~100

Current detection compensation for setting inverter control set too high may cause performance degradation. Generally do not need to modify.

A5-06Brown-point settingFactory default100.0%
Setting range60.0%~140.0%

For setting undervoltage fault Err09 voltage value, different voltage levels of the inverter 100.0% are corresponding to different voltage points, namely:

220V single-phase or three-phase 220V: 200V Three-phase 380V: 350V

A5-07SVC optimization modelFactory default1
Setting range0not optimize
1optimization model 1
2optimization model 2

Optimization Mode 1: There is a high torque control linearity requirements when using

Optimized Mode 2: Use a higher speed stability requirements

A5-08Dead-time adjustmentFactory default150%
Setting range100%~200%

A6 group: AI curve setting

A6-00Min. input of AI curve 4Factory default0.00V
Setting range-10.00V~A6-02
A6-01Setting for min. input of AI curve 4Factory default0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-02Input of inflection point 1 of AI curve 4Factory default3.00V
Setting rangeA6-00~A6-04
A6-03Setting for input of inflectionpointFactory default30.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-04Input of inflection point 2 of AI curve 4Factory default6.00V
Setting rangeA6-02~A6-06
A6-05Setting for input of inflectionpointFactory default60.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-06Max. input of AI curve 4Factory default 10.00V
Setting rangeA6-06~10.00V
A6-07Setting for max. input of AI curve 4Factory default100.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-08Min. input of AI curve 4Factory default0.00V
Setting range-10.00V~A6-10
A6-09Setting for min. input of AI curve 4Factory default
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-10Input of inflection point 1 of AI curve 5Factory default
Setting rangeA6-08~A6-12
A6-11Setting for input of inflection point 1 of AI curve 5Factory default
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-12Input of inflection point 2 of AI curve 5Factory default 6.00V
Setting rangeA6-10~A6-14
A6-13Setting for input of inflection point 2 of AI curve 5Factory default 60.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-14Max. input of AI curve 5Factory default 10.00V
Setting rangeA6-14~10.00V
A6-15Setting for max. input of AI curve 5Factory default 100.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%

Curve function curve 4 and curve 5 1 to 3 is similar to the curve, but the curve 1 to curve 3 a straight line and the curve 4 and curve 5 for the 4-point curve, you can achieve a more flexible correspondence. Figure 6-32 is a schematic curve curve 4 to 5.

MSW FI-7500 - A5 Group-- Control optimization parameters - 1

line | Parameter | Description | | :--- | :--- | | Analog input (corresponding to the set amount) | Al maximum input correspondence | | Al curve inflection point 1 corresponds to the setting | 0V (0mA) | | Al curve inflection point 2 corresponds to the setting | 0V (0mA) | | Al curve inflection point 1 | 10V (20mA) | | Al minimum input correspondence | -100% | | 100% threshold at 10V (20mA) | Al maximum input correspondence | The chart displays a single line representing the output of an aluminum curve in the input voltage range. The annotation 'Corresponding setting' indicates the input voltage is measured by the corresponding input current.

Figure 6-32 Curves 4 and 5wiring diagram

Curve 4 and 5 to set the curve should note that the minimum input voltage curve, the inflection point voltage 1, 2 inflection point voltage, maximum voltage must be successively increased.

AI curve selection P33 is used to determine the analog input AI1 \~ AI3 how to choose five curves.

A6-24AI1 sets jump pointFactory default 0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-25AI1 sets jump rangeFactory default
Setting range0.0%~100.0%
A6-26AI2 sets jump point Factory default
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-27AI2 sets jump rangeFactory default
Setting range0.0%~100.0%
A6-28AI3 sets jump pointFactory default 0.0%
Setting range-100.0%~100.0%
A6-29AI3 sets jump rangeFactory default 0.5%
Setting range0.0%~100.0%

VFD analog input AI1 \~ AI3, possess setpoint skip function.

Skip function means that when a corresponding analog set point jump up and down when the interval changes, the analog value corresponding to the set point value is fixed at the jump.

Example: Analog input AI1 voltage at 5.00V fluctuations, fluctuation in the range of 4.90V \~ 5.10V, AI1 minimum input 0.00V corresponds to 0.0%, the maximum input 10.00V corresponds to 100.%, then detected the corresponding setting AI1 between 49.0% \~ 51.0% volatility.

Setting AI1 setting jump points A6-24 50.0%, set AI1 setting A6-25 jump amplitude of 1.0%, and then the above AI1 input, after the jump function to give the corresponding input of AI1 setting is fixed at 50.0% AI1 is converted into a stable input, eliminating fluctuations.

A7 group--User-programmable functions

See User-programmable controller card Supplementary Manual.

AC group: AIAO calibration

AC-00AI1 measured voltage 1Factory default Calibration
Setting range0.500V~4.000V
AC-01AI1 display voltage 1Factory default Calibration
Setting range0.500V~4.000V
AC-02AI1 measured voltage 2Factory default Calibration
Setting range6.000V~9.999V
AC-03AI1 display voltage 2Factory default Calibration
Setting range6.000V~9.999V
AC-04AI2 measured voltage 1Factory default Calibration
Setting range0.500V~4.000V
AC-05AI2 display voltage 1Factory default Calibration
Setting range0.500V~4.000V
AC-06AI2 measured voltage 2Factory default Calibration
Setting range6.000V~9.999V
AC-07AI2 display voltage 2 Factory default
Setting range-9.999V~10.000V
AC-08AI3 measured voltage 1 Factory default
Setting range-9.999V~10.000V
AC-09AI3 display voltage 1Factory default
Setting range-9.999V~10.000V
AC-10AI3 measured voltage 2Factory default Calibration
Setting range-9.999V~10.000V
AC-11AI3 display voltage 2Factory default Calibration
Setting range-9.999V~10.000V

The function code is used for analog input AI is corrected to eliminate the effect of AI input bias and gain. The group function parameter had been corrected, restoring factory value, it returns to the factory value after correction. Usually the application site does not require correction.

Found voltage means, such as a multimeter measuring instruments to measure out actual voltage, voltage refers to the display inverter out of the sampled voltage value is displayed, see U0 group AI before correction voltage (U0-21, U0-22, U0-23) display.

When the correction in each AI input port of each two input voltage values, respectively, the multimeter to measure the value of the group read the value of U0 group, accurate input to the function codes, the inverter will automatically AI zero bias and gain correction.

AC-12A01 target voltage 1Factory default Calibration
Setting range0.500V~4.000V
AC-13A01 measured voltage 1Factory default Calibration
Setting range0.500V~4.000V
AC-14A01 target voltage 2Factory default Calibration
Setting range6.000V~9.999V
AC-15A01 measured voltage 2Factory default Calibration
Setting range6.000V~9.999V
AC-16A02 target voltage 1Factory default Calibration
Setting range0.500V~4.000V
AC-17A02 measured voltage 1Factory default Calibration
Setting range0.500V~4.000V
AC-18A02 target voltage 2Factory default Calibration
Setting range6.000V~9.999V
AC-19A02 measured voltage 2Factory default Calibration
Setting range6.000V~9.999V

The function code is used for analog input AO is corrected to eliminate the effect of AI input bias and gain. The group function parameter had been corrected, restoring factory value, it returns to the factory value after correction. Usually the application site does not require correction.

Target voltage refers to the theoretical value of the inverter output voltage. Found voltage refers measured by instruments such as multimeters actual output voltage value.

U0 Group--Monitoring

U0 parameter group is used to monitor the inverter operation status information, customers can view the panel, in order to facilitate on-site commissioning, set parameter values can also be read through communication, for PC monitor. Wherein, U0-00 \~ U0-31 is run down and monitoring parameters P7-03 and P7-04 defined.

See specific parameters function code, parameter name and the smallest unit in Table 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Parameters of U0
group

Function code Name Unit
U0-00Running frequency (Hz)0.01Hz
U0-01Setting frequency (Hz)0.01Hz
U0-02Busbar voltage (V)0.1V
U0-03Output voltage (V)1V
U0-04Output current (A)0.01A
U0-05Output power (kW)0.1kW
U0-06Output torque (%)0.1%
U0-07DI input state1
U0-08DO output state1
U0-09AI1 voltage (V)0.01V
U0-10AI2 voltage (V)0.01V
U0-11AI3 voltage (V)0.01V
U0-12Count value1
U0-13Length value1
U0-14Loading speed display1
U0-15PID setting1
U0-16PID feedback1
U0-17PLC stage1
U0-18Input PULSE frequency (Hz)0.01kHz
U0-19Feedback speed (0.1Hz)0.1Hz
U0-20Surplus operation run0.1Min
U0-21AI1 voltage before calibration0.001V
U0-22AI2 voltage before calibration0.001V
U0-23AI3 voltage before calibration0.001V
U0-24Linear speed1m/Min
U0-25Current electrifying time1Min
U0-26Current running time0.1Min
U0-27Input PULSE frequency1Hz
U0-28Communication given value0.01%
U0-29Feedback speed of encoder0.01Hz
U0-30Display of main frequency X0.01Hz
U0-31Display of auxiliary frequency Y0.01Hz
U0-32View any memory address value1
U0-34Motor temperature1 °C
U0-35Target torque (%)0.1%
U0-36Rotating location1
U0-37Angle of power factor0.1
U0-39VF separates target voltage1V
U0-40VF separates output voltage1V
U0-41Visual display of DI input state1
U0-42Visual display of DO input state1
U0-43Visual display 1 of DI function state1
U0-44Visual display 2 of DI function state1
U0-45Setting frequency (%)0
U0-59Running frequency (%)0.01%
U0-60State of frequency convertor 0.01%
U0-61Display of auxiliary frequency Y1
U0-62View any memory address value1

Chapter 7 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)

7.1 Definition

Electromagnetic compatibility means that electrical equipment operates under environment of electromagnetic interference, but it does not interfere electromagnetic environment and realizes the function stably.

7.2 Introduction of EMC standard

According to requirements of national standard GB/T12668.3, frequency convertor shall conform to requirements of two aspects: electromagnetic interference and anti-electromagnetic interference.

Our current products execute latest international standards: IEC/EN61800-3: 2004 (Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods), which is equal to national standard GB/T12668.3.

IEC/EN61800-3 mainly checks frequency convertor from two aspects: electromagnetic interference and anti-electromagnetic interference. Electromagnetic interference mainly tests radiated interference, conducted interference and harmonic interference of frequency convertor (requirements on the frequency convertor for civil use). Anti-electromagnetic interference mainly tests conduction immunity, radiated immunity, surge immunity, fast changed pulse group, ESD immunity and immunity of low-frequency terminal of power (specific test items include: 1. immunity test for input voltage sag, interruption and change; 2. immunity test for commutation notch; 3. immunity test for harmonic input; 4. change test for input frequency; 5. unbalance test for input voltage; 6. fluctuation test for input voltage). The test is conducted as per strict requirements of above IEC/EN61800-3, and please install our company products as per instructions of 7.3, which own good electromagnetic compatibility under general industry environment.

7.3 EMC guidance

7.3.1 Influence of harmonic: higher harmonic of power will damage frequency convertor, so it's suggested to install AC input reactor in the places with weak quality of power grid.
7.3.2 Electromagnetic interference and installing precautions: there are two kinds of electromagnetic interference. One is interference of surrounding electromagnetic noise for frequency convertor, and another is interference produced by frequency convertor for peripheral equipment.

Installing precautions:

1) Earthing wire of frequency convertor and other electrical products should be well grounded;
2) Do not layout power input and output line or weak current signal line (e.g. control circuit) of frequency convertor in parallel, layout them vertically if possible;
3) It's suggested to use shield cable or steel tube shield power line for output power line of frequency convertor, and keep reliable earthing of shield layer. For the lead of equipment with interference, it's suggested to use dual twisted pair shield control line and keep reliable earthing of shield layer;
4) For the motor cable exceeding 100m, output filter or electric reactor should be installed.

7.3.3 Handling method of interference produced by peripheral electromagnetic equipment for frequency convertor: in general, the cause of frequency convertor produces electromagnetic influence is that many relays, contactors or electromagnetic brakes are installed nearby frequency convertor. If any malfunction of frequency convertor due to interference, it's suggested to adopt below methods:

1) The devices producing interference are installed with surge suppressor;
2) Install filter in input terminal of frequency convertor as per 7.3.6 for operation;

3) Control signal line and lead of detection circuit adopt shield cable, and keep reliable earthing.

7.3.4 Handling method of interference produced by peripheral equipment for frequency convertor: there are two kinds of noise, namely radiated interference of frequency convertor and conducted interference of frequency convertor. These two interference lead to electromagnetic or electrostatic induction of peripheral electrical equipment, and then cause malfunction of equipment. Aiming at different interference, below solutions can be referred:

1) The signal of instruments, receivers and sensor for measurement is generally weak. If they are

near to frequency convertor or in the same control cabinet, the frequency convertor is easily interfered and malfunction produces. It's suggested to adopt below solutions: keep away from interference source as far as possible; do not layout signal line and power line in parallel, or bundle up them in parallel; signal line and power line adopt shield line, keep reliable earthing; install ferrite core (range of blanketing frequency is 30\~1000MHz) on output side of frequency convertor and wind 2\~3 turns in the same direction. For serious situation, EMC output filter can be installed;

2) If interfered equipments share the same power with frequency convertor, conducted interference will produce. If interference can't be eliminated through above method, EMC filter shall be installed between frequency convertor and power (refer to 7.3.6 for model selection operation);
3) Independent earthing of peripheral equipment can eliminate the interference produced by leak current of ground lead of frequency convertor.

7.3.5 Leak current and handling: there are two kinds of forms of leak current when using frequency convertor: leak current to ground, and leak current between lines.

1) Factors influencing leak current to ground and solutions:

There is distributed capacitance between wire and ground. The larger the distributed capacitance, the larger the leak current will be, so reduce the distance between frequency convertor and motor to decrease distributed capacitance. The larger the carrier frequency, the larger the leak current will be, so decrease carrier frequency to reduce leak current. However, decreasing carrier frequency will lead to increasing motor noise. Please note that installing reactor is an effective way to solve leak current.

Leak current increases with enlargement of loop current, so the larger the motor power, the larger the corresponding leak current will be.

2) Factors influencing leak current between lines and solutions:

There is distributed capacitance between output wiring of frequency convertor. If the current passing circuit contains higher harmonic, resonance may be caused to produce leak current. If using thermal relay at this time, malfunction may occur.

The solution is to reduce carrier frequency or install output reactor. When using frequency convertor, it's not suggested to install thermal relay between frequency convertor and motor, but use electric over-current protection function of frequency convertor.

7.3.6 Precautions about installing EMC input filter on power input terminal:

1) Caution: please strictly abide by rated value when using filter. As filter is I-class electric appliance, metal shell of filter should contact well with metal of installing cabinet, and good electric conduction continuity is required, otherwise there is risk of electric shock and EMC effect will be seriously influenced;
2) According to EMC test, filter and PE terminal of frequency convertor should be connected on the same ground, otherwise EMC effect will be seriously influenced;
3) The filter should be installed nearby power input terminal of frequency convertor as far as possible.

Chapter 8 Fault diagnosis and countermeasures

8.1 Fault warning and countermeasures

Frequency convertor owns 24 warning information and protection functions. Once the fault occurs, protection function starts action and the frequency convertor stops output. Fault relay of frequency convertor starts contact action and fault code displays on display panel of frequency convertor. Before users seek for service, they can examine by themselves as per instructions in this chapter to analyze fault cause and find out solutions. If the causes are those in dotted line box, please seek for service and contact with agent of frequency convertor or our company directly.

Fault nameInvert unit protection
Display panel Err01
Check fault causeShort circuit of output loop of frequency convertorToo long wiring between motor and frequency convertorOverheating moduleInternal wiring of frequency convertor becomes looseAbnormal main control panelAbnormal driver boardAbnormal inversion module
Fault handling methodEliminate peripheral faultInstall electric reactor or output filterCheck if blocking of air channel and normal work of fan, eliminate existingproblemsInsert all connecting linesSeek for technical supportSeek for technical supportSeek for technical support
Fault nameAccelerated over-current
Display panel Err02
Check fault cause1. Earthing or short circuit of output loop of frequency convertor2. Control way is vector and there is no parameter identification3. Too short acceleration time4. Manual torque promotion or V/F curve is not suitable5. Low voltage6. Start rotating motor7. Impact load during acceleration process8. Model selection of frequency convertor is small
Fault handling method1. Eliminate peripheral fault2. Conduct parameter identification of motor3. Increase acceleration time4. Adjust manual torque promotion or V/F curve5. Adjust voltage to normal range6. Start tracking rotation speed or restart after motor stops7. Cancel impact load8. Select the frequency convertor with larger power grade
Display panelErr03
Check fault cause1. Earthing or short circuit of output loop of frequency convertor2. Control way is vector and there is no parameter identification3. Too short acceleration time4. Low voltage5. Impact load during acceleration process6. No brake unit or brake resistance is installed
Fault handling method1. Eliminate peripheral fault2. Conduct parameter identification of motor3. Increase acceleration time4. Adjust voltage to normal range5. Cancel impact load6. Install brake unit and brake resistance
Fault nameConstant-speed over-current
Display panel Err04
Check fault cause1. Earthing or short circuit of output loop of frequency convertor2. Control way is vector and there is no parameter identification3. Low voltage4. Impact load during acceleration process5. Model selection offrequency convertor is small
Fault handling method1. Eliminate peripheral fault2. Conduct parameter identification of motor3. Adjust voltage to normal range4. Cancel impact load5. Select the frequency convertor with larger power grade
Fault nameAccelerated overvoltage
Display panelErr05
Check fault cause1. Low input voltage2. External force drives motor to operate during acceleration process3. Too short acceleration time4. No brake unit or brake resistance is installed
Fault handling method1. Adjust voltage to normal range2. Cancel external force or install brake resistance3. Increase acceleration time4. Install brake unit and brake resistance
Fault nameDecelerated overvoltage
Display panelErr06
Check fault cause1. High input voltage2. External force drives motor to operate during deceleration process3. Too short deceleration time4. No brake unit or brake resistance is installed
Fault handling method1. Adjust voltage to normal range2. Cancel external force or install brake resistance3. Increase deceleration time4. Install brake unit and brake resistance
Fault nameConstant-speed overvoltage
Display panel Err07
Check fault cause1. High input voltage2. External force drives motor to operate during deceleration process
Fault handling method1. Adjust voltage to normal range2. Cancel external force or install brake resistance
Fault nameFault of control power
Display panel Err08
Check fault cause1. Input voltage is not within specified range
Fault handling method1. Adjust voltage to specified range
Fault name Undervoltage fault
Display panel Err09
Check fault cause1. Instantaneous power failure2. Voltage on input terminal of frequency convertor isnot within specified range3. Abnormal busbar voltage4. Abnormal rectifier bridge and buffer resistance5. Abnormal driver board6. Abnormal control panel
Fault handling method1. Reset fault2. Adjust voltage to normal range3. Seek for technical support4. Seek for technical support5. Seek for technical support6. Seek for technical support
Fault nameOverload of frequency convertor
Display panel Err10
Check fault cause1. Too large load or locked-rotor of motor2. Model selection of frequency convertor is small
Fault handling method1. Decrease load, check motor and machinery2. Select the frequency convertor with larger power grade
Fault nameOverload of motor
Display panelErr11
Check fault causeIs protection parameter P9-01 of motor set properlyToo large load or locked-rotor of motorModel selection of frequency convertor is small
Fault handling methodSet the parameter correctlyDecrease load, check motor and machinerySelect the frequency convertor with larger power grade
Fault nameInput default phase
Display panelErr12
Check fault cause1. Abnormal three-phase input power2. Abnormal driver board3. Abnormal anti-thunderpanel4. Abnormal main control panel
Fault handling method1. Check and eliminate problems in peripheral circuit2. Seek for technical support3. Seek for technical support4. Seek for technical support
Fault name Output default phase
Display panel Err13
Check fault cause1. Abnormal lead from frequency convertor to motor2. Unbalanced three-phase output of frequency convertor during motor operation3. Abnormal driver board4. Abnormal module
Fault handling method1. Eliminate peripheral fault2. Check if three-phase winding is normal and remove fault3. Seek for technical support4. Seek for technical support
Fault nameOverheating module
Display panelErr14
Check fault causeToo high environment temperatureAir channel is blockedFan is damagedThermistor of module is damagedInverter module is damaged
Fault handling methodReduce environment temperatureClear the fanChange the fanChange the thermistorChange the inverter module
Fault nameFault of peripheral equipment
Display panelErr15
Check fault cause1. Input signal of external fault through multi-function terminal DI2. Input signal of external fault through virtual IO function
Fault handling method1. Reset operation2. Reset operation
Fault nameCommunication fault
Display panelErr16
Check fault cause1. Abnormal work of host computer2. Abnormal communication line3. Incorrect setting of communication expansion card P0-284. Incorrect setting of PD group of communication parameter

Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Fault diagnosis and countermeasures

Fault handling method1. Check wiring of host computer2. Check wiring of communication line3. Set type of communication expansion card correctly4. Set communication parameters correctly
Fault nameContactor fault
Display panelErr17
Check fault cause1. Abnormal driver board and power2. Abnormal contactor
Fault handling method1. Change driver board or power2. Change contactor
Fault nameFault of current detection
Display panel Err18
Check fault cause1. Abnormal Hall device2. Abnormal driver board
Fault handling method1. Change Hall device2. Change driver board
Fault nameTuning fault of motor
Display panel Err19
Check fault cause1.Motor parameter is not set as per nameplate2.Parameter identification process overtimes
Fault handling method1.Set motor parameter correctly as per nameplate2.Check the lead between frequency convertor and motor
Fault nameFault of encoding disk
Display panelErr20
Check fault cause1. Model of encoder does not match2. Incorrect wiring of encoder3. Encoder is damaged4. Abnormal PG card
Fault handling method1. Set model of encoder correctly based on actual situation2. Remove wiring fault3. Change encoder4. Change PG card
Fault nameRead-write fault of EEPROM
Display panel Err21
Check fault cause1. EEPROM chip is damaged
Fault handling method1. Change main control panel
Fault nameHardware fault of frequency convertor
Display panel Err22
Check fault cause1. Overvoltage exists2. Over-current exists
Fault handling method1. Process as per overvoltage fault2. Process as per over-current fault
Fault nameTo-ground short circuit fault
Display panelErr23
Check fault cause1. To-ground short circuit of motor
Fault handling method1. Change cable or motor
Fault nameFault of reaching accumulative operation time
Display panelErr26
Check fault cause1. Accumulative operation time reaches set value
Fault handling method1. Use parameter initialization function to eliminate recorded information
Fault nameUser defined fault 1
Display panel Err27
Check fault cause1.Input signal of user defined fault 1 through multi-function terminal DI2.Input signal of user defined fault 1 through virtual IO function
Fault handling method1.Reset operation2.Reset operation
Fault nameUser defined fault 2
Display panelErr28
Check fault cause1. Input signal of user defined fault 2 through multi-function terminal DI2. Input signal of user defined fault 2 through virtual IO function
Fault handling method1. Reset operation2. Reset operation
Fault nameFault of reaching accumulative electrifying time
Display panel Err29
Check fault cause1. Accumulative electrifying time reaches set value
Fault handling method1. Use parameter initialization function to eliminate recorded information
Fault nameOff-load fault
Display panel Err30
Check fault cause1. Running current of frequency convertor is < P9-64
Fault handling method1. Confirm if load is separated or if P9-64, P9-65 parameter settings conform to actual operation condition
Fault nameFault of PID feedback loss during operation
Display panel Err31
Check fault cause1. PID feedback is smaller than PA-26 set value
Fault handling method1. Check PID feedback signal or set PA-26 to be a suitable value
Fault nameCycle-by-cycle over-current fault
Display panel Err40
Check fault causeToo large load or locked-rotor of motorModel selection of frequency convertor is small
Fault handling methodDecrease load, check motor and machinerySelect the frequency convertor with larger power grade
Fault name Fault of motor switch during operation
Display panelErr41
Check fault cause1. Alter current motor selection through terminal during operation of frequency convertor
Fault handling method1. Switch motor after frequency convertor halts
Fault nameFault of too large speed deviation
Display panelErr42
Check fault cause1. Incorrect parameter setting of encoder2. No parameter identification is conducted3. Too large speed deviation, parameter settings of P9-69, P9-60 are irrational
Fault handling method1. Set parameters of encoder correctly2. Conduct parameter identification3. Set detection parameters rationally based on actual situation
Fault nameOver-speed fault of motor
Display panel Err43
Check fault causeIncorrect parameter setting of encoderNo parameter identification is conductedSettings of over-speed detection parameters P9-69, P9-60 are irrational
Fault handling methodSet parameters of encoder correctlyConduct parameter identificationSet detection parameters rationally based on actual situation
Fault nameOver-temperature fault of motor
Display panelErr45
Check fault cause1. Wiring of temperature sensor is loose2. Motor temperature is too high
Fault handling method1. Detect temperature sensor and eliminate fault2. Decrease carrier frequency or adopt other heat dissipation measures to handle heat dissipation of motor
Fault nameIncorrect initial position
Display panelErr51
Check fault cause1. Motor parameter deviates largely from actual value
Fault handling method1. Reconfirm if motor parameters are correct especially if setting of rated current is small

8.2 Common faults and handling methods

Below fault s may occur during using process of frequency convertor, please refer to below methods for simple fault analysis:

Figure 8-1 Common faults and handling methods

No.Fault phenomenonPossible causesSolutions
1No display when electrifyingNo or too low network voltage; fault of switch power on driver board of frequency convertor; rectifier bridge is damaged; buffer resistance of frequency convertor is damaged; fault of control panel and keyboard; disconnected wiring between control panel, driver board and keyboard;Check input power; check busbar voltage; pull out and insert flat cable again; seek for service from manufacturer
2Display HC when electrifyingBad contact between driver board and control panel; Related devices on control panel are damaged; to-ground short-circuit of motor or motor line; Hall fault; too low network voltage;Pull out and insert flat cable again; seek for service from manufacturer
3Display “Err23” when electrifyingTo-ground short-circuit of motor or output line; frequency convertor is damaged;Measure insulation between motor and output line with tramegger; seek for service from manufacturer
4Normal display when electrifying, display “HC” after operation and shut downFan is damaged or blocked; short-circuit wiring of peripheral control terminal;Change fan; eliminate external short-circuit fault
5Frequent alarm of Err14 (overheating module)Higer setting of carrier frequency; fan is damaged or air channel is blocked; internal devices of frequency convertor are damaged (thermocouple or others)Reduce carrier frequency (P0-15); change fan, clear air channel; seek for service from manufacturer
6Motor doesn’t rotate after frequency convertor operatesMotor and motor line; wrong parameter setting of frequency convertor (motor parameter); bad contact between driver board and control panel; fault of driver boardReconfirm wiring between frequency convertor and motor; change motor or eliminate mechanical fault; check and reset motor parameters
7Invalid DI terminalWrong parameter settings; external signal error; OP and +24V jumper loose; fault of control panelCheck and reset parameters of P4 group; reconnect external signal line; reconfirm OP and +24V jumpers; seek for service from manufacturer
8Motor speed can’t promote when closed-loop vector controlsEncoder fault; wrong wiring or poor contact of encoder; fault of PG card; fault of driver boardChange code disk and reconfirm wiring; change PG card; seek for service
9Frequent alarm of overvoltage and over-current faultIncorrect parameter setting of motor; inappropriate acceleration/deceleration time fluctuation of load;Reset motor parameters or tune motor; set acceleration and deceleration time; seek for service from manufacturer

countermeasures
Specification of high-performance vector convertor
Fault diagnosis and countermeasures

No.Fault phenomenonPossible causesSolutions
10Display Err17 when electrifying (or operating)Soft starting contactor is not closed;Check if contactor cable is loose; check if any fault with contactor; check if any fault with 24V power supply of contactor; seek for service from manufacturer;
11Display when electrifyingRelated devices on control panel are damaged;Change control panel;

Appendix A: Multi-function card VFD-PC1

(Apply to machines at 3.7kW and above)

I. Introduction

VFD-PC1 card is a multi-function expansion card released by Company to match with this series frequency convertor. It contains below resources:

ItemSpecificationDescription
Input terminal5-pin digital signal input
1-pin analog voltage signal inputSupport voltage input signal at -10V~10V
Output terminal1-pin relay signal output
1-pin digital signal output
1-pin analog signal output
CommunicationRS-485 communication interfaceSupport Modbus-RTU communication protocol (see details in Appendix I: VFD-Modbus communication protocol)
CAN communication interface Support CANlink communication protocol

II. Mechanical installation and functional descriptions of control terminals

  1. Installation way, functional definitions of control terminals and jumper descriptions can respectively refer to Figure 1, Table 1 and Table 2 in Appendix 1

1) Please install after complete outage of frequency convertor;
2) Align expansion card interface and location hole of multi-function card and control panel on frequency convertor;
3) Fix with screw.

MSW FI-7500 - Mechanical installation and functional descriptions of control terminals - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device chassis with ventilation grilles and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

Appendix A: Figure1 Installation way of multi-function card

Appendix A: Functional descriptions of control terminals

CategoryTerminal symbolTerminal nameFunctional description
Power+24V-COMConnect +24V power externallyProvide +24V power externally, be used as working power of digital input and output terminal as well as power of external sensor; maximum current current: 200mA
OP1Power terminal of digital inputOP1 and “+24V” have been connected by J8 when leaving factory. If using external power, OP1 shall connect with external power and pull out J8
Analog inputAI3-PGNDAnalog input terminal 31. Opto-isolator input, differential voltage input and temperature sense resistor input areaccepted2. Input voltage range: DC -10V~10V3. PT100, PT1000 temperature sensor4. Use dial switch S1 to decide input way, do not use different functions at the same time
Function digital input terminalsDI6-OP1Digital input 61. Opto-isolator: be compatible with bipolarinput2. Input impedance: 2.4kΩ3. Voltage range during level input: 9~30V
DI7-OP1 Digital input 7
DI8-OP1 Digital input 8
DI9-OP1Digital input 9
DI10-OP1 Digital input 10
Analog outputAO2-GNDAnalog output 21. Specification of output voltage: 0 V~10V2. Specification of output current:0mV~20mV
Digital outputDO2-CMEDigital output 2Opto-isolator, output voltage range of bipolar open collector: 0V~24V, output current range: 0mA~50mA. Attention: digital output CME1 and digital input COM are internally isolated, and J7 connection is by default. If DO2 needs to drive by external power, J7 must be disconnected
Relay output (RELAY2)PA-PB Normally-closed terminalDrive capability of contact: AC250V, 3A, COSφ=0.4. DC 30V, 1A
PA-PCNormally-open terminal
RS-485 communication485+/485-Communication interface terminalInput and output signal terminals of Modbus-RTU protocol communication, isolation input
CAN communicationCANH/CANLCommunication interface terminalInput terminal of CANlink protocol communication, isolation input

Appendix A: Table 2 Jumper description

Jumper No. Description
J3AO2 output selection-voltage, current
J4Select matched resistance for CAN terminal
J1Select matched resistance for RS485 terminal
J7Select CME1 connection way
J8Select OP1 connection way
S1Function selection of AI3, PT100, PT1000

a

Appendix B: Instructions of IO expansion card (VFD-IO1)

(Apply to all series machines)

I. Introduction

IO expansion card VFD-IO1 offers 3-pin DI.

II. Mechanical installation and functional descriptions of control terminals

  1. Installation way and functional definitions of wiring terminals can respectively refer to Figure 1 and Table 1 in Appendix 2

1) Please assemble and disassemble after complete outage of frequency convertor;
2) Align expansion card interface and location hole of I/O expansion card and control panel on frequency convertor;
3) Fix communication card with screw as shown in Figure 1.

MSW FI-7500 - Mechanical installation and functional descriptions of control terminals - 1

natural_image Isometric technical line drawing of a server or chassis unit with internal components and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

Appendix B: Figure 1 Installation way of VFD-IO1

Function definition of wiring terminals:

Appendix B: Table 1 Functional descriptions of wiring terminals

CategoryTerminal symbolTerminal nameFunctional description
Power+24V-COMConnect +24V power externallyProvide +24V power externally, be used as working power of digital input/output terminal as well as power of external sensor; maximum current current: 200mA
OP2Power terminal of digital inputNo power connection of OP2 when leaving factory, connect to external power based on demands
Function digital input terminalsDI6-OP2Digital input 61. Opto-isolator: be compatible with bipolarinput2. Input impedance: DI6, DI7: 3.3kΩ, DI8:2.4kΩ3. Voltage range during level input: 9~30V4. DI6, DI7 are common input terminals, inputfrequency <100Hz; DI8 is high-speed pulse input terminal, max. input frequency <100kHz
DI7-OP2Digital input 7
DI8-OP2Digital input 8

Appendix C: Instructions of expansion card for common encoder

(Apply to all series machines)

I. Introduction

VFD is equipped with expansion card for common encoder (namely PG card). As an optional accessory, it's necessary for closed-loop vector control of frequency convertor. Select corresponding PG card as per output way of encoder, and the specific models are as follows:

Optional accessoriesDescription Other
VFD-PG1Differential input of PG card without frequency dividing outputTerminal wiring
VFD-PG2PG card of rotary transformerDB9 bus socket
VFD-PG3OC input of PG card, frequency dividing output at 1:1Terminal wiring

II. Mechanical installation and functional descriptions of control terminals

  1. Installation way, appearance, specification and signal definition of wiring terminal can respectively refer to Figure 1 and Table 1 in Appendix C:

1) Please assemble and disassemble PG card after complete outage of frequency convertor;

2) Connect J3 on control panel with expansion card through 18pin FFC (ensure correct installation and proper snap joint).

MSW FI-7500 - Introduction - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of an industrial electronic device with cooling fins and internal components (no text or symbols)

Appendix E: Figure 1 Installation way of expansion card for encoder

Appendix C: Table 1 Specification and signal definitions of wiring terminals

Differential PG card (VFD-PG1)
VFD-PG1 specification
User interfaceOblique cutting terminal
Distance3.5mm
Screw Straight
Pluggable No
Wire gauge16-26AWG
Maximum rate500kHz
Differential signal amplitude of input≤7V
VFD-PG1 signal definition of wiring
No. Symbol Description
1 A+Encoder output A signal +
2 A-Encoder output A signal -
3 B+Encoder output B signal +
4 B-Encoder output B signal -
5 Z+Encoder output Z signal +
6 Z-Encoder output Z signal -
7 5VProvide 5V/100mA power externally
8 COMPower ground
9 PEShield terminal
PG card of rotary transformer (VFD-PG2)
VFD-PG2 specification
User interfaceDB9 female contact
Pluggable Yes
Wire gauge>22AWG
Resolution ratio 12 digit
Driving frequency10kHz
VRMS 7V
VP-P3.15±27%
VFD-PG2 terminal
No. Symbol Description
1 EXC1- driving of rotary transformer
2EXC+ driving of rotary transformer
3SIN+ feedback SIN of rotary transformer
4SINLO- feedback SIN of rotary transformer
5COS+ feedback COS of rotary transformer
6-8--
9COSLO- feedback COS of rotary transformer
OC PG card (VFD-PG3)
VFD-PG3 specification
User interface Oblique cutting terminal
Distance3.5mm
Screw Straight
Pluggable No
Wire gauge16-26AWG
Maximum rate100KHz
VFD-PG3 terminal
No. Symbol Description
1A Encoder output A signal
2B Encoder output B signal
3ZEncoder output Z signal
415VProvide 15V/100mA power externally
5COMPower ground
6COMPower ground
7 A1PG card feedback output A signal at 1:1
8 B1PG card feedback output B signal at 1:1
9PEShield terminal

(Apply to all series)

I. Introduction

It's specially developed for CANlink communication function of this series frequency convertor.

II. Mechanical installation and functional descriptions of control terminals

  1. Installation way and appendix B: the same with IO expansion card (VFD-IO1). Functional descriptions of wiring terminals and jumper descriptions respectively refer to Figure 1, Table 1 and Table 2 in Appendix D:

Appendix D: Table 1 Functional description of control terminal

CategoryTerminal symbolTerminal nameFunctional description
CAN communication (CN1)CANH/CANLCommunication interface terminalCAN communication input terminal
COMPower ground of CAN communication

Appendix D: Table 2 Jumper description

Jumper No.Description
J2Select matched resistance for CAN terminal

Appendix E: Instructions of RS-485 communication expansion card (VFD-TX1)

(Apply to all series)

I. Introduction

It's specially developed for 485 communication function of this series frequency convertor. By adopting isolation scheme, electric parameters conform to international standard and users can select based on demands so as to control operation of frequency convertor and set parameters through remote serial port;

II. Mechanical installation and functional descriptions of control terminals

  1. Installation way and appendix B: the same with IO expansion card (VFD-IO1). Functional descriptions of wiring terminals and dial-up definitions respectively refer to Table 1 and Table 2 in Appendix E:

Functional description of control terminal:

Appendix E: Table 1 Functional description of control terminal

Category TerminalsymbolTerminal nameFunctional description
485 communication (CN1)485+/485-Communication interface terminal485 communication input terminal, isolation input
CGNDPower ground of 485 communicationIsolated power

Jumper description:

Appendix E: Table 2 Jumper description

Jumper No. Description
J1Select matched resistance for 485 terminal

Note:

To prevent communication signal from external interference, communication wire can use twisted pair and avoid using parallel lines as far as possible;

Appendix F: VFD-Modbus communication protocol

This series frequency convertor provides RS232/RS485 communication interface and supports Modbus communication protocol. Users can realize centralized control through computer or PLC, set run command of frequency convertor through communication protocol, modify or read parameters of function code, read working condition and fault information of frequency convertor, etc.

I. Protocol content

The serial communication protocol defines transmissive information contents and using format of serial communication, including format for polling of host (or broadcast), encoding method of host such as function code of required action, transmission data and error verification, etc. The response of slave also adopts same structure and the contents include action confirmation, data return and error verification, etc. If any error of slave when receiving information or failure to finish the action required by host, the slave will organize a fault message as response feedback for the host.

Application mode: frequency convertor accesses to “single-host and multiple-slave” PC/PLC control network with RS232/RS485 bus.

Structure of bus

(1) Interface mode

RS232/RS485 hardware interface

(2) Transmission mode: asynchronous serial and half-duplex. For the host and slave at the same moment, one can only send data and another can only receive data. During serial asynchronous communication process, data is sent with the form of message frame by frame.

(3) Topological structure: single-host and multiple-slave system. The setting range of slave address is 1\~247 and 0 is address of broadcast communication. Slave address in network should be unique.

Protocol description

Communication protocol of this series frequency convertor is a kind of asynchronous serial master-slave Modbus communication protocol, and only one device (host) in the network can establish protocol (called as "query/command"). Other devices (slave) can only response the "query/command" of host by providing data or take corresponding actions based on "query/command" of host. Host refers to personal computer (PC), industrial control equipment or programmable logic controller (PLC), etc, and slave means this series frequency convertor. The host can not only communicate with certain slave separately, but issue broadcast information to all inferior slaves. For separately accessed "query/command" of host, the slave needs to return a message (called as response). For the broadcast information issued by the host, the slave does not need to feedback response to host.

Structure of communication materials: communication data format of modbus protocol for this series frequency convertor is as below:

For RTU mode, message sending starts with pause time for at least 3.5 characters. Diverse character time under network Baud rate is easily realized (as shown in below T1-T2-T3-T4). The first domain of transmission is equipment address.

The available transmission character is hexadecimal 0...9, A...F. Network equipment detects network bus constantly, including pausing interval time. When receiving first domain (address domain), each equipment will decode to judge if sending to own. After the last transmission character, the pause time of at least 3.5 characters marks the ending of message. A new message will start after the pause.

The whole message frame should be continuous streaming transfer. If the dwell time exceeds 1.5 characters before frame finishes, receiving equipment will refresh incomplete message and assume that next byte is address domain of a new message. Similarly, if a new message starts within time of 3.5 characters following previous message, receiving equipment will consider it as the delay of previous message, and then error will be caused, as it's impossible for the value of final CRC domain to be correct.

RTU frame format

Frame header STARTTime of 3.5 characters
Slave ADR Address1~247
CMD code03: read slave parameters; 06: write slave parameters
DATA (N-1)Data content: address of function code parameters, number of function code parameters, value of function code parameters, etc
DATA (N-2)
......
DATA0
CRC CHK high-orderDetection value: CRC value
CRC CHK low-order
ENDTime of 3.5 characters

CMD and DATA

CMD code: 03H, read N word (12 words at most). For example: start address F002 of frequency convertor with slave address being 01 reads 2 values successively

CMD message of host

ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Start address high-orderF0H
Start address low-order02H
Register No. high-order00H
Register No. low-order02H
CRC CHK high-orderCRC CHK value to be calculated
CRC CHK low-order

Response message of slave

PD-05 is set as 0:

ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Byte No. high-order 00H
Byte No. low-order04H
Data F002Hhigh-order00H
Data F002Hlow-order00H
Data F003Hhigh-order00H
Data F003Hlow-order01H
CRC CHKlow-orderCRC CHK value to be calculated
CRC CHKhigh-order

FD-05 is set as 1:

ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Byte No.04H
Data F002Hhigh-order00H
Data F002Hlow-order00H
Data F003Hhigh-order00H
Data F003Hlow-order01H
CRC CHK low-orderCRC CHK value to be calculated
CRC CHK high-order

CMD code: 06H, write one word. For example: write 5000 (1388H) in F00AH address of frequency convertor with slave address being 02H.

CMD message of host

ADR 02H
CMD 06H
Data address high-orderF0H
Data address low-order0AH
Data content high-order13H
Data content low-order88H
CRC CHK low-orderCRC CHK value to be calculated
CRC CHK high-order

Response message of slave

ADR 02H
CMD 06H
Data address high-orderF0H
Data address low-order0AH
Data content high-order13H
Data content low-order88H
CRC CHK low-orderCRC CHK value to be calculated
CRC CHK high-order

Verification mode-CRC verification mode: CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) uses RTU frame format, and message includes error detection domain based on CRC method. CRC domain detects the contents of whole message. CRC domain is two-byte and includes 16-bit binary system value. It's added to message after calculation by transmission equipment. Receiving equipment recalculates CRC of received message and compares with value in received CRC domain. If two CRC values are not equal, the transmission is wrong.

CRC firstly stores 0xFFFF, and then calls a course to process successive 8-bit bytes in message and value in current register. Only 8Bit data in each character is valid for CRC, start bit, stop bit and parity check bit are invalid.

During producing process of CRC, each 8-bit byte is XOR with register contents separately. Finally, it moves to the direction of least significant bit, and most significant bit is filled with 0. LSB is extracted for detection. If LSB is 1, register is XOR with preset value. If LSB is 0, no action. Repeat the whole process for 8 times. After last bit ( 8^th bit) finishes, next 8-bit byte is XOR with current value of register alone. The final value in register is CRC value after all bytes in message are executed.

When adding CRC to message, add low byte firstly and then high byte. Simple function of CRC is as below:

unsigned int crc_chk_value (unsigned char *data_value, unsigned char length) {
    unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
    int i;
    while (length--) {
    crc_value^=*data_value++;
    for (i=0;i<8;i++) {
    if (crc_value&0x0001)
    {
    crc_value= (crc_value>>1)
    }
    else crc_value=crc_value>>1;
    {
    }
    }
    }
    return (crc_value);
} 

Address definition of communication parameter

This part is communication content used for controlling operation of frequency convertor, setting state and related parameters of frequency convertor.

Read-write function code parameter (some function codes can't be modified, but are simply used or monitored by manufacturer).

Marking rules of function code parameter address:

Express rules with group No. and marking No. of function code being parameter address:

High byte: P0\~PF (P group), A0\~AF (A group), 70\~7F (U group); low byte: 00\~FF

E.g.: P3-12, address is expressed as P30C;

Note: PF group: neither read nor modify parameters;

U group: only read but not modify parameters.

When the frequency convertor is in running status, some parameters can't be modified. Some parameters can't be modified no matter what is the status of frequency convertor. When modifying the function code parameters, range, unit and related descriptions of parameters should be also noticed.

Besides, as EEPROM is frequently stored, it will reduce lifespan of EEPROM. Therefore, under communication mode, some function codes don't have to be stored, and only modify the value in RAM.

If it's P group parameter, changing high-order F of the function code address to be 0 can realize the function. If it's A group parameter, changing high-order A of the function code address to be 4 can realize the function. Corresponding function code address is expressed as below: high-order byte: 00\~0F (P group), 40\~4F (A group); low-order byte: 00\~FF

E.g.: function code P3-12 is not stored in EEPROM, the address is expressed as 030C; function code A0-05 is not stored in EEPROM, the address is expressed as 4005; the address can only write RAM and conduct read action. When reading, it's invalid address. For all parameters, CMD code 07H can also be used to realize the function.

When the frequency convertor is in running status, some parameters can't be modified. Some parameters can't be modified no matter what is the status of frequency convertor. When modifying the function code parameters, range, unit and related descriptions of parameters should be also noticed.

Halt/running parameters:

Parameter address Parameter description
1000*Communication setting value (-10000~10000) (decimal system)
1001 Running frequency
1002 Busbar voltage
1003Output voltage
1004 Output current
1005 Output power
1006Output torque
1007 Running speed
1008DI input mark
1009DO output mark
100AAI1 voltage
100BAI2 voltage
100C AI3voltage
100DCount value input
100ELength value input
100F Loading speed
1010PID setting
1011PID feedback
1012PLC step
1013PULSE frequency, unit 0.01kHz
1014Feedback speed, unit 0.1Hz
1015 Surplus running time
1016AI1 voltage before calibration
1017AI2 voltage before calibration
1018AI3 voltage before calibration
1019 Linear speed
101A Current electrifying time
101BCurrent running time
101CPULSE frequency, unit 1Hz
101DCommunication setting value
101EActual feedback speed
101FPrincipal frequency X display
1020Auxiliary frequency Y display

Note:

Communication setting value is percentage of relative value, namely 10000 corresponds to 100.00%, -10000 corresponds to -100.00%. For frequency dimension, this percent is the percentage of relatively largest frequency (P0-10). For the data of torque dimension, this percent is P2-10, A2-48, A3-48, A4-48 (upper limit setting of torque respectively corresponds to first and second motor).

Input command order to frequency convertor: (only write)

Command word address Command function
20000001: foreward operation
0002: reverse operation
0003: foreward inching
0004: reverse inching
0005: free halt
0006: deceleration halt
0007: fault reset

Read status of frequency convertor: (only read)

Status word addressStatus word function
30000001: foreward operation
0002: reverse operation
0003: halt

Cryptographic check of parameter locking: (if returning to be 8888H, pass cryptographic check)

Password address Contents of inputting password
1F00 *****
Command address Command contents
2001BIT0: DO1 output controlBIT1: DO2 output controlBIT2: RELAY1 output controlBIT3: RELAY2 output controlBIT4: FMR output controlBIT5: VDO1BIT6: VDO2BIT7: VDO3BIT8: VDO4BIT9: VDO5

Control of analog outputAO1: (only write)

Command address Command contents
20020~7FFF means 0%~100%

Control of analog output AO2: (only write)

Command address Command contents
20030~7FFF means 0%~100%

Control of PULSE output: (only write)

Command addressCommand contents
20040~7FFF means 0%~100%

Fault description of frequency convertor:

Fault address Fault message
80000000: no fault0001: reserve0002: accelerated overcurrent0003: decelerated overcurrent0004: constant-speed overcurrent0005: accelerated overvoltage0006: decelerated overvoltage0007: constant-speed overvoltage0008: overload fault of buffer resistance0009: undervoltage fault000A: overload of frequency convertor000B: overload of motor000CL: default phase of input000D: default phase of output000E: overheating module000F: external fault0010: abnormal communication0011: abnormal contactor0012: current detection fault0013: motor tuning fault0014: fault of encoder/PG card0015: abnormal read-write of parameter0016: hardware fault of frequency convertor0017: to-ground short-circuit fault of motor0018: reserve0019: reserve001A: reach running time001B: user-defined fault 1001C: user-defined fault 2001D: reach electrifying time001E: off-load001F: PID feedback loss during operation0028: overtime fault of fast current-limiting0029: fault of motor switch during operation002A: too large velocity misalignment002B: supervelocity of motor002D: over-temperature of motor005A: wrong setting of line number of encoder005B: not connecting with encoder005C: error of initial position005E: error of velocity feedback
Communication fault addressFunctional description of fault
80010000: no fault0001: wrong password0002: wrong command code0003: wrong CRC verification0004: invalid address0005: invalid parameter0006: invalid parameter alternation0007: system is locked0008: EEPROM operation is proceeding

Description of PD group communication parameters

Pd-00Baud rateFactory default6005
Setting rangeUnit: MODUBS Baud rate0: 300BPS1: 600BPS2: 1200BPS3: 2400BPS4: 4800BPS5: 9600BPS6: 19200BPS7: 38400BPS8: 57600BPS9: 115200BPS

The parameter is used to set data transmission rate between host computer and frequency convertor. Please note that the Baud rate of host computer and frequency convertor should be consistent. Otherwise, communication is unable to proceed. The larger the Baud rate, the faster the communication speed.

Fd-01Data formatFactory default0
Setting range0: no verification: data format <8,N,2>1: even verification: data format <8,E,1>2: odd verification: data format <8,O,1>3: no verification: data format <8-N-1>

The data format of host computer and frequency convertor should be consistent. Otherwise, communication is unable to proceed.

Pd-02Local addressFactory default1
Setting range1~247, 0 is broadcast address

If local address is set as 0, namely broadcast address, broadcast function of host computer can be realized.

Local address is unique (apart from broadcast address), and it's the basis to realize point-to-point communication between host computer and frequency convertor.

Pd-03Response delayFactory default2ms
Setting range0~20ms

Response delay: interval time between ending time of data reception of frequency convertor and time of sending data of host computer. If response delay is shorter than system processing time, response delay takes system processing time as criterion. If response delay is longer than system

processing time, delay await is required after system processes data. After reaching response delay time, data will be sent to host computer.

Pd-04Communication overtimeFactory default0.0 s
Setting range0.0 s (invalid)0.1~60.0s

If function code is set to be 0.0s, parameter of communication overtime is invalid.

If function code is set to be valid value, interval time between one communication and next communication exceeds communication overtime, the system will give alarm of communication fault (Err 16). Under normal conditions, it's set to be invalid. If setting subparameter in the system of continuous communication, communication status can be monitored.

Pd-05Communication protocol Factory default0
Setting range0: non-standard Modbus protocol1: Standard Modbus protocol

PD-05=1: select standard Modbus protocol.

PD-05=0: when reading command, number of bytes returned by slave has one more byte than standard Modbus protocol. See details in “5 communication data structure” of the protocol.

Pd-05Communication reads current resolutionFactory default0
Setting range0: 0.01A1: 0.1A

It's used to confirm output unit of current value when communication reads output current.

Wprowadzenie

text_image W A B 10.2

MSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 1

natural_image Technical line drawing of a rectangular enclosure with dimensions labeled H, D, and H1 (no text or symbols beyond labels)
text_image ≥100mm A A ≥100mm

Montaż korpusu

MSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 2

natural_image Line drawing of two identical rectangular electronic devices with control panels and indicator lights (no text or symbols)
natural_image Line drawing of a mechanical device with no visible text or symbols
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device with internal components and mounting holes (no text or symbols)
line | czas | Częstotliwość sygnału detekcji | | ---- | -------------------------------- | | 0 | ON | | 1 | ON | | 2 | ON | | 3 | ON | | 4 | ON | | 5 | ON | | 6 | ON | | 7 | ON | | 8 | ON | | 9 | ON | | 10 | ON | | 11 | ON | | 12 | ON | | 13 | ON | | 14 | ON | | 15 | ON | | 16 | ON | | 17 | ON | | 18 | ON | | 19 | ON | | 20 | ON | | 21 | ON | | 22 | ON | | 23 | ON | | 24 | ON | | 25 | ON | | 26 | ON | | 27 | ON | | 28 | ON | | 29 | ON | | 30 | ON | | 31 | ON | | 32 | ON | | 33 | ON | | 34 | ON | | 35 | ON | | 36 | ON | | 37 | ON | | 38 | ON | | 39 | ON | | 40 | ON | | 41 | ON | | 42 | ON | | 43 | ON | | 44 | ON | | 45 | ON | | 46 | ON | | 47 | ON | | 48 | ON | | 49 | ON | | 50 | ON | | 51 | ON | | 52 | ON | | 53 | ON | | 54 | ON | | 55 | ON | | 56 | ON | | 57 | ON | | 58 | ON | | 59 | ON | | 60 | ON | | 61 | ON | | 62 | ON | | 63 | ON | | 64 | ON | | 65 | ON | | 66 | ON | | 67 | ON | | 68 | ON | | 69 | ON | | 70 | ON | | 71 | ON | | 72 | ON | | 73 | ON | | 74 | ON | | 75 | ON | | 76 | ON | | 77 | ON | | 78 | ON | | 79 | ON | | 80 | ON | | 81 | ON | | 82 | ON | | 83 | ON | | 84 | ON | | 85 | ON | | 86 | ON | | 87 | ON | | 88 | ON | | 89 | ON | | 90 | ON | | 91 | ON | | 92 | ON | | 93 | ON | | 94 | ON | | 95 | ON | | 96 | ON | | 97 | ON | | 98 | ON | | 99 | ON | | 100 | ON |
line | czas | Prąd wyjściowy | Sygnał wykrycia przekroczenia prądu wyjściowego | |------|----------------|--------------------------------------------------| | 0 | Low | Low | | 1 | High | Low | | 2 | Medium | Low | | 3 | Low | Low | | 4 | High | Low | | 5 | Medium | Low | | 6 | Low | Low | | 7 | High | Low | | 8 | Medium | Low | | 9 | Low | Low | | 10 | High | Low | | 11 | Medium | Low | | 12 | Low | Low | | 13 | High | Low | | 14 | Medium | Low | | 15 | Low | Low | | 16 | High | Low | | 17 | Medium | Low | | 18 | Low | Low | | 19 | High | Low | | 20 | Medium | Low | | 21 | Low | Low | | 22 | High | Low | | 23 | Medium | Low | | 24 | Low | Low | | 25 | High | Low | | 26 | Medium | Low | | 27 | Low | Low | | 28 | High | Low | | 29 | Medium | Low | | 30 | Low | Low | | 31 | High | Low | | 32 | Medium | Low | | 33 | Low | Low | | 34 | High | Low | | 35 | Medium | Low | | 36 | Low | Low | | 37 | High | Low | | 38 | Medium | Low | | 39 | Low | Low | | 40 | High | Low | | 41 | Medium | Low | | 42 | Low | Low | | 43 | High | Low | | 44 | Medium | Low | | 45 | Low | Low | | 46 | High | Low | | 47 | Medium | Low | | 48 | Low | Low | | 49 | High | Low | | 50 | Medium | Low | | 51 | Low | Low | | 52 | High | Low | | 53 | Medium | Low | | 54 | Low | Low | | 55 | High | Low | | 56 | Medium | Low | | 57 | Low | Low | | 58 | High | Low | | 59 | Medium | Low | | 60 | Low | Low | | 61 | High | Low | | 62 | Medium | Low | | 63 | Low | Low | | 64 | High | Low | | 65 | Medium | Low | | 66 | Low | Low | | 67 | High | Low | | 68 | Medium | Low | | 69 | Low | Low | | 70 | High | Low | | 71 | Medium | Low | | 72 | Low | Low | | 73 | High | Low | | 74 | Medium | Low | | 75 | Low | Low | | 76 | High | Low | | 77 | Medium | Low | | 78 | Low | Low | | 79 | High | Low | | 80 | Medium | Low | | 81 | Low | Low | | 82 | High | Low | | 83 | Medium | Low | | 84 | Low | Low | | 85 | High | Low | | 86 | Medium | Low | | 87 | Low | Low | | 88 | High | Low | | 89 | Medium | Low | | 90 | Low | Low | | 91 | High | Low | | 92 | Medium | Low | | 93 | Low | Low | | 94 | High | Low | | 95 | Medium | Low | | 96 | Low | Low | | 97 | High | Low | | 98 | Medium | Low | | 99 | Low | Low | | P8-36 (Limit prądu wyjściowego) / Czas opóźnienia wykrycia przekroczenia prądu wyjściowego P8-37 (Czas opóźnienia wykrycia przekroczenia prądu wyjściowego P8-37)
line | czas | wyjściowa | | ---- | --------- | | 0 | 0 | | Początkowa PID PA-21 | 0 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1 | | 0 | 1.5 | | 0 | 1.5 | | 0 | 1.5 | | 0 | 1.5 | | 0 | 1.5 | | 0 | 1.5 | | 0 | 1.5 | | 0 | 1.5 | | 0 | 1.5 | | 0 | 1.5 |
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device chassis with ventilation grilles and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)
natural_image Isometric line drawing of an electronic device chassis with visible internal components and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)
natural_image Technical line drawing of an industrial electronic device casing with internal components and ventilation grilles (no text or symbols)
natural_image Technical line drawing of a rectangular enclosure or enclosure with dimensions labeled D and H (no text or symbols beyond labels)

MSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 3

natural_image Technical line drawing of a dual fan assembly (no text or symbols)
text_image W A B 10.2 D H H1
text_image ≥100mm A A ≥100mm
natural_image Technical line drawing of two identical electrical cabinet designs (no text or symbols)
natural_image Line drawing of a multi-tiered industrial or electronic device with no visible text or symbols
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device with internal components and mounting holes (no text or symbols)
line | Frequency Range | Jump Frequency Range | |---|---| | Jump frequency range | 0 to 1 | | Jump frequency range | 1 to 2 |
line | čas | Výstupní proud | | --- | --- | | 0 | 0 | | Peak | High | | Mid | Medium-High | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | Mid | Medium | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | Low | | High | High | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak |High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | Lower | | 0 | 0 | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Mid | Medium-High | | Low | Low | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak | High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak |High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak |High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak |High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak |High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak |High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak |High | | High | Low | | Low | Lower | | Peak |High | | High }
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device chassis with visible components and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)
natural_image Isometric line drawing of a computer chassis with visible internal components and mounting bracket (no text or labels)
natural_image Technical line drawing of an industrial server or rack unit with internal components and ventilation grilles (no text or symbols)
text_image Ventiating Fan Panel shell operation panel Middle shell Pan Inverter Nameplate Bottom mounting hole
text_image W A B D H
text_image W A B HL D H
natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with no visible text or symbols
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device chassis with mounting holes and internal components (no text or symbols)
text_image Less than 20 meters Potentiometer VFD +10V AI1 GND PE

Figure 3-7 Wiring diagram of analog input terminal

MSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 4

text_image cross or wind 2~3 turns in same direction External analog source 0.022uF 、 50V Ferrite core VFD AI1 GND
text_image Electrical circuit diagram with transistors, diodes, and logic gates labeled with component numbers and symbols

Contrôleur externe

line | Output frequency | Output voltage | | ---------------- | -------------- | | V1 | V1 | | Vb | Vb | | f1 | V1 | | fb | Vb |
line | Time Point | Tension Vb w % | | :--- | :--- | | V1 | V1 | | V2 | V3 | | F3 | F3 | | Fb | Fb |
K1K2Run command
00Step
01Reversion
10Forward
11Stop

MSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 5

flowchart
graph TD
    K1 --> D11["Forward run (PWD)"]
    K2 --> D12["Reverse running (REV)"]
    COM --> D12
    D11 --> VFD
    D12 --> VFD
    COM --> VFD
K1K2Run command
00Stop
01Reversion
10Forward
11Stop

MSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 6

text_image K1 K2 VFDN200G D11: Forward run (PWD) D12: Reverse running (REV) COM: Digital common port
flowchart
graph TD
    A["SB2"] --> B["DI1"]
    C["SB1"] --> D["DI3"]
    E["SB3"] --> F["DI2 Reverse run (REV)"]
    B --> G["VFD Forward running (FWD)"]
    D --> H["Three line operation control"]
    F --> I["COM Digital public end"]
line Corresponding to the setting (Frequency, rotational speed) | Frequency, rotational speed | AI | | :--- | :--- | | 100.0% | 0V(0mA) | | 10V(20mA) | 10V(20mA) |

MSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 7

line Corresponding to the setting (Frequency, rotational speed) | Frequency | Rotation Speed | | :--- | :--- | | 0V(0mA) | -100.0% | | 10V(20mA) | 100.0% |
line | Time | Value | |------|-------| | t1 | 0 | | t2 | Peak | | t1 | 0 | | t2 | 0 |

Temps t

Fig. 6-11 Courbe S, A
MSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 8

line | Time (T) | Frequency (Hz) | | -------- | -------------- | | Start | 0 | | Peak | 100 | | Final | 0 |

Fig. 6-12 Courbe S, B

line | Time t | Output frequency Hz | Output voltage effective value | Halt DC braking amount | Run command | | ------ | ------------------- | ------------------------------ | ----------------------- | ----------- | | 0 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 100 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 200 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 300 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 400 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 500 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 600 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 700 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 800 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 900 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1000 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1100 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1200 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1300 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1400 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1500 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1600 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1700 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1800 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 1900 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2000 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2100 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2200 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2300 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2400 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2500 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2600 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2700 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2800 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 2900 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | 3000 | 100 | 0 | 0 | 0 | | Note: The output frequency Hz is calculated based on the input voltage effective value and halt the braking amount. The halt time is marked as 'Halt DC braking waiting time'. The 'Halt DC braking time' is labeled as 'Halt DC braking schematic'. The 'Run command' is marked as 'Run command'. The 'Time t' axis is labeled 'Time t'.
P7-03LED display running parameters 1Factory default1F
Setting range0000~FFFFMSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 9Running frequency 1 (Hz)Set frequency (Hz)Bus voltage (V)Output voltage (V)Output current (A)Output power (kW)Output torque (%)DI input status (V)DO output statusAI1 voltage (V)AI2 voltage (V)AI3 voltage (V)Count valueLength valueLoad speed displayPID settingIf a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set P7-03 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
MSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 10
P7-04LED display running parameters 2Factory default0
Setting range0000~FFFFMSW FI-7500 - Wprowadzenie - 11PID feedbackPLC stagePulse setting frequency (kHz)Running frequency 2Remaining running timeAI1 voltage before correctionAI2 voltage before correctionAI3 voltage before correctionLinear speedCurrent power-on time (Hour)Current running time (Minute)Pulse setting frequency (Hz)Communication setting valueEncoder feedback speed (Hz)Main frequency X display (Hz)Auxiliary frequency Y display (Hz)If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set P7-04 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
line | Time Segment | Output Frequency (Hz) | | ------------ | --------------------- | | Forward | High | | Deadtime | Low | | Reversion | Low |
line | Time | Frequency (Hz) | |------|----------------| | 0 | Low | | 1 | High | | 2 | Peak | | 3 | High | | 4 | Peak | | 5 | Low | | 6 | Medium | | 7 | Low | | 8 | Low | | 9 | Low | | 10 | Low | | 11 | Low | | 12 | Low | | 13 | Low | | 14 | Low | | 15 | Low | | 16 | Low | | 17 | Low | | 18 | Low | | 19 | Low | | 20 | Low |

Fig. 6-16 Niveau FDT

line | temps | Courant de sortie | |-------|-------------------| | 0 | 0 | | Peak 1| High | | Peak 2| Medium | | Peak 3| Low | | Peak 4| High | | Peak 5| Medium | | Peak 6| Low | | Peak 7| High | | Peak 8| Medium | | Peak 9| Low | | Peak 10| High |
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device chassis with visible internal components and mounting brackets (no text or labels)
natural_image Isometric line drawing of a server rack unit with internal components and mounting bracket (no text or labels)
natural_image Technical line drawing of an internal electronic device casing with cooling fins and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)
text_image W A B D H
natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical or electronic device with no visible text, numbers, or symbols.
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device with internal components and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)
text_image K1 0 0 1 1 1 K2 Stop Reverse Håtra Forward Elore Step VFD K1 DI1: Forward run (PWD) Elore K2 DI2: Reverse naming (REV) Håtra COM: Digital common port Normal digitals port

6-7 ábra Bilineáris mód 2

COM digital public end

text_image Technical diagram showing a trapezoidal profile with horizontal dashed lines and vertical arrows indicating depth or displacement.
text_image Technical diagram showing a stepped profile with dimension annotations and a separate schematic view.
natural_image Technical line drawing of an electronic device chassis with ventilation grilles and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)
natural_image Isometric line drawing of a server rack unit with ventilation grilles and mounting bracket (no text or labels)
natural_image Technical line drawing of an industrial electronic device casing with internal components and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)
text_image Ventiating Fan Panel shell operation panel Middle shell Pan Inverter Nameplate Bottom mounting hole
text_image W A D H B.S
text_image 70 16.50 127 138.9 DATA JOG COM SETTER SETTER SETTER SETTER
text_image E F Aluminiumrad B A C D G

Figur 2-8 Dimensionsritning av extern likströmsreaktor

Uncoil/Coil ---- 20 \~30%

Centrifug---- 50%\~60%

Tillfällig

bromsbelastning---- 5%

10% i allmänhet

text_image Bₙ A A Bₙ
natural_image Technical line drawing of two identical electronic devices with control panels and buttons, no text or symbols present.
text_image VFD +24v DO Relä Diod CME COM
Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : MSW

Model : FI-7500

Category : Frequency converter